Yamaha YPT-310 Handleiding

Categorie
Synthesizer
Type
Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Owner’s Manual
EN
2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply
(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power sup-
ply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on
the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by
Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety
markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO
CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications with-
out notice or obligation to update existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-
fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-
ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing
loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high
volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time
period before damage occurs.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat-
ing to how a function or effect works (when the unit is
operating as designed) are not covered by the manufac-
turer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibil-
ity. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user
safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe
that our products and the production methods used to pro-
duce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the let-
ter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the
following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable bat-
tery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average
life span of this type of battery is approximately five years.
When replacement becomes necessary, contact a quali-
fied service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries.
Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the
battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the
charger is intended for the battery being charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or
with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be
installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation
may result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.
Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used
batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your
area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type bat-
teries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or
for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an
end, please observe all local, state, and federal regula-
tions that relate to the disposal of products that contain
lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to
assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product.
The model number, serial number, power requirements,
etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model
number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the
spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-
nent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
92-BP (bottom)
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 3
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY
THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-
tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-
ments. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC,
to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high qual-
ity shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-
ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-
zation to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regula-
tions, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance
with these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/
uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users man-
ual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-
tions does not guarantee that interference will not
occur in all installations. If this product is found to be
the source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate
the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reori-
ent the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm rib-
bon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-
tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized
to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate
the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-
ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder
Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sam-
melstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren
Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(class B)
(battery)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar
ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge
netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or
slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta
verkosta.
(standby)
4 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injur y or even death from
electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the
instrument or overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.
Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place
heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip
over, or roll anything over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If
it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have
it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells
or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injur y to you or others, or
damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord.
Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-
connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause
overheating in the outlet.
Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity
markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid
leakage.
Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries
together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline
batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or
different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause
overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.
Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.
When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long
time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of
the battery fluid.
Keep batteries away from children.
If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid
should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately
with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly
cause loss of sight or chemical burns.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold
or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or
radio may generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Battery
Location
(4)-11 1/2
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 5
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other
cables.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the
power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the
minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make
sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or
rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to
the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening
level.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint
thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the
panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this
might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do
not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at
a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent
hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,
consult a physician.
Saving and backing up your data
Some data items (page 31) are automatically saved as backup data in the
internal memory even if you turn the power off.
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save
important data to external device such as a computer.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are
not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect
to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer soft-
ware, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and
contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences.
DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly pro-
hibited except for your personal use.
Trademarks
•Windows is the registered trademarks of Microsoft
®
Corporation.
The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-
panies.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Saving data
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from
those on your instrument.
(4)-11 2/2
6 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Congratulations and thank you for purchasing
the Yamaha PSR-E313/YPT-310 PORTATONE!
Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument
in order to take full advantage of its various features.
Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading,
and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compat-
ible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of
manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM
System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone gener-
ation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator.
However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original
data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.
Stereo Sampled Piano
The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo
sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone
generation system.
Yamaha Education Suite 5
The instrument features the new Yamaha Education Suite—a set of learning tools that utilize
the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulfilling than ever
before!
Touch Response
The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch,
gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices.
Style File
The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single
unified format.
The PSR-E313/YPT-310 package includes the
following items. Please check that you have them
all.
• Music rest
• Owner’s manual (this book)
Formats and functions
Supplied Accessories
Music rest
Insert the music
rest into the slots
as shown.
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 7
Formats and functions ...............................................6
Supplied Accessories.................................................6
Setting Up 8
Power Requirements .................................................8
Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) .9
Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .................9
Using the MIDI Terminals ..........................................9
Turn on the power...................................................... 9
Panel Controls and Terminals 10
Front Panel ..............................................................10
Rear Panel ...............................................................10
— Quick Guide —
Step 1
Changing the Voices 12
Try playing a variety of instrument Voices ...............12
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual .............13
Playing Different Voices with the Left and
Right Hands—Split ...............................................14
Playing the Grand Piano Voice ................................15
Drum kits.................................................................. 15
Step 2
Fun Sounds 17
Step 3
Playing Songs 18
Select and Listen to a Specific Song .......................18
Step 4
Play with a Style 20
Selecting a rhythm of a Style ...................................20
Playing with a Style.................................................. 21
Step 5
Play Using the Music Database 23
Step 6
Play With The Metronome 24
Start the metronome ................................................24
Step 7
Record your own performance 27
Recording Your Performance ..................................27
Recording to a specified track..................................28
Deleting User Songs ................................................30
Backup and Initialization 31
Backup .....................................................................31
Initialization ..............................................................31
Basic Operation and Displays 32
Basic Operation .......................................................32
Display .....................................................................34
Song Lesson 35
Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn)........................................ 35
Lesson 2 (Timing) ....................................................37
Lesson 3 (Waiting) ...................................................38
Song settings 39
Changing the Melody Voice .................................... 39
Song Volume........................................................... 39
Mute ........................................................................ 40
Practice Makes Perfect ........................................... 41
Play With a Variety of Effects 42
Adding Harmony...................................................... 42
Adding Reverb......................................................... 43
Adding Chorus......................................................... 44
Adding Panel Sustain .............................................. 44
Handy Performance Features 45
Touch Response Sensitivity .................................... 45
Setting the Split Point .............................................. 46
Transpose ............................................................... 46
Tuning ..................................................................... 47
One Touch Setting .................................................. 47
Changing the tempo of the Song/Style.................... 48
Adjusting the Voice Parameters .............................. 48
Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 49
Various ways to start and stop Style playback ........ 49
Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................... 51
Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................... 53
Registering Style Files............................................. 54
Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords 55
Easy Chords............................................................ 55
Standard Chords ..................................................... 55
Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ...... 57
Function Settings 59
Select the item and change the value ..................... 59
About MIDI 61
What is MIDI?.......................................................... 61
What You Can Do With MIDI................................... 61
Transferring Performance Data To and
From Another Instrument..................................... 62
Transferring data between
the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer............. 65
Troubleshooting ...........................................................69
Voice List.......................................................................70
Maximum Polyphony ............................................... 70
Drum Kit List .................................................................76
Style List .......................................................................79
Music Database List .....................................................80
Effect Type List .............................................................81
MIDI Implementation Chart ..........................................82
MIDI Data Format ..........................................................84
Effect map ............................................................... 84
Specifications ...............................................................85
Index ..............................................................................86
Contents
8 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.
Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an
AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not
deplete resources.
Using an AC Power Adaptor
q Make sure that the power of the instrument is off
(the backlit display is off).
w Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply
jack.
e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Using Batteries
q Open the battery compartment cover located on the
instrument’s bottom panel.
w Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful
to follow the polarity markings on the side of the
compartment.
e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it
locks firmly in place.
For battery operation the instrument requires six
1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alka-
line batteries are recommended.) When battery
power becomes too low for proper operation, the
volume may be reduced, the sound may be dis-
torted, and other problems may occur. When this
happens, make sure to replace all batteries, follow-
ing the precautions listed below.
If necessary, also make sure to save all important
User data (see page 31), since custom panel set-
tings are lost when the batteries are removed.
Power Requirements
Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent
recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other
adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the
adaptor and the instrument.
WARNING
Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the
instrument, or during electrical storms.
CAUTION
AC power
adaptor
AC outlet
w
e
•Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when
the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power
is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting
in loss of the data being transferred and the data cur-
rently in the transfer destination during transferring or
recording a data.
CAUTION
Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of
batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have
sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low,
possibly resulting in loss of data in the flash memory.
Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orienta-
tion, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incor-
rect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or
leaking of corrosive chemicals.
When the batteries run down, replace them with a com-
plete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new
batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g.
alkaline and manganese) at the same time.
If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time,
remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible
fluid leakage from the battery.
Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to
flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types)
can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the bat-
teries do become drained during a data transfer, both the
data being transferred and the data currently in the trans-
fer destination will be lost.
CAUTION
Setting Up
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 9
Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on.
The PSR-E313/YPT-310 speakers are automatically
shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The
PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external
output.
You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a
keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape
recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the
instrument’s output signal to that device.
The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain
as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug
the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and
use it to switch sustain on and off.
The instrument also features MIDI terminals, allow-
ing you to interface the instrument with other MIDI
instruments or computers. (For more information, see
page 61.)
Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER
VOLUME] control to the left and press the
[STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press-
ing the switch again turns the power off.
Backup data in the flash memory (page 31) is loaded
to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no
backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument
settings are restored to the initial factory defaults
when the power is turned on.
Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)
Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)
•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for
long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear
fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing.
WARNING
•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the
external devices at the minimum setting and turn power
off the devices before connecting them. Failure to
observe these precautions may result in electric shock or
equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all
devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the
desired listening level.
CAUTION
Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to
the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing
this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-
ing in reversed footswitch operation.
NOTE
Using the MIDI Terminals
Turn on the power
MIDI instrument
MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to
MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc.
NOTE
When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off,
a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by
the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for
a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor
from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from
the instrument.
CAUTION
•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!”
message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage
the flash memory and result in a loss of data.
CAUTION
10 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
Front Panel
q [STANDBY/ON] switch ....................................page 9, 32
w [MASTER VOLUME] control ......................... pages 9, 32
e LESSON PART
[L] button .............................................................page 36
[R] button.............................................................page 36
e [REC TRACK 2] button........................................ page 29
[REC TRACK 1] button........................................ page 29
r [LISTEN & LEARN] button..................................page 36
t [TIMING] button...................................................page 37
y [WAITING] button ................................................page 38
u [FUNCTION] button..................................... pages 59, 33
i [SONG] button............................................. pages 18, 33
o [STYLE] button............................................ pages 20, 33
!0 [VOICE] button ............................................ pages 12, 33
!1 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO] ............page 33
!2 [DEMO] button.....................................................page 19
!3 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .........................page 24
!4 [A-B REPEAT] button..........................................page 41
!5 [REW] button .......................................................page 19
!6 [FF] button ...........................................................page 19
!9 [PAUSE] button....................................................page 19
!4 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ......................................page 21
!5 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................................page 51
!6 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button...................................page 51
!9 [SYNC START] button.........................................page 21
!7 [TEMPO/TAP] button...........................................page 48
!8 [REC] button........................................................page 27
@0 [START/STOP] button .........................................page 32
@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button..............................page 15
@2 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................................page 23
@3 [REVERB ON/OFF] button..................................page 43
@4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................................page 14
@5 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................................page 13
@6 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ..............................page 42
@7 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ....................................page 45
@8 Drum Kit...............................................................page 16
Rear Panel
@9 MIDI IN/OUT terminals ........................................page 61
#0 SUSTAIN jack.........................................................page 9
#1 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ......................................... page 9
#2 DC IN 12V jack.......................................................page 8
When the lesson mode
When the recording mode
When the Song mode
When the Style mode
w
q
e
!4
!5 !7
!6
!8
Song List (page 19)
Style List (page 76)
Front Panel
Panel Controls and Terminals
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 11
GrandPno
001
001
GrandPno
001
001
r
t
!9
y
@6 @7
!3
!2
@5
!1
u
!0
o
i
@0 @4
@3
@2
@1
@8
Voice List (page 70)
Display (page 34)
Music Database List (page 80)
#2#1#0@9
Rear Panel
12 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
— Quick Guide —
Step
1
Changing the Voices
In addition to the piano Voice, a wide variety of other instrument Voices can be selected and
played, including guitar, trumpet and flute. The Voice selected here becomes the Main Voice.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The Voice number and name are displayed.
2
Select a Voice.
Select the desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+],
[-].
Refer to the Voice List on page 70.
3
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing different Voices.
Try playing a variety of instrument Voices
GrandPno
001
001
Voice number Voice name
Appears when the
Voice mode.
Flute
084
The Voice shown here
becomes the Main Voice
for the instrument.
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 13
Quick Guide
You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on the previ-
ous page. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice.
Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the Dual function on.
When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the
Main Voice.
To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the
[DUAL ON/OFF] button again.
The best-suited Dual Voice is automatically selected whenever you
turn Dual on, but you can select any of the available Dual Voices.
1
Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.
“D. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Dual
Voice will appear.
2
Select a Dual Voice.
Select the desired Dual Voice by using the number buttons [0]–
[9], [+], [-].
Refer to the Voice List on page 70.
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual
Play the Dual Voice
Selecting a Dual Voice
Two Voices sound at the
same time
Flute
084
001
Appears when Dual
is on.
•You can also access the
Dual Voice setting display
by pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button several times,
then selecting Dual Voice.
NOTE
Marimba
102
001
Hold for longer
than a second.
Currently selected Dual Voice
Step 1 Changing the Voices
14 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.
The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to
the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice”
Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the Split function on.
When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split
Point.
When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT ON/
OFF] button to turn Split off.
You can select a different Split Voice by following the procedure out-
lined below.
1
Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.
“S. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Split
Voice will appear.
2
Select a Split Voice
Select the desired Split Voice by using the number buttons [0]–
[9], [+], [-].
Refer to the Voice List on page 70.
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split
Play the Split Voice
Select a Split Voice
Main Voice and Dual
Voice
Split Voice
Split Point
Choir
059
001
Appears when Split
is on.
The Split Point setting can
be changed as required
(page 46).
NOTE
•You can also access the
Split Voice setting display
by pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button several times,
then selecting the Split
Voice.
NOTE
FngrBass
039
001
Hold for longer
than a second.
The currently selected
Split Voice
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 15
Quick Guide
When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button.
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
The Voice “Grand Piano 001” will automatically be selected as
the Main Voice.
Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion
instruments.
When drum kits (Voice number 109–121) are
selected, you can play different percussion sounds
directly from the keyboard.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
2
Select the desired Drum kit.
Select one of the Voice numbers from 109–121 by using the num-
ber buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Playing the Grand Piano Voice
Drum kits
Std.Kit1
109
Example: 109 Standard Kit 1
Step 1 Changing the Voices
16 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kit List
3
Try out each key.
You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more—a compre-
hensive variety of drum and percussion sounds.
Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit
can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 76.
Example: 109 Standard Kit 1
To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned
to each key, look at the icons printed above the keys.
109 Standard Kit 1 116 Jazz Kit
110 Standard Kit 2 117 Brush Kit
111 Room Kit 118 Symphony Kit
112 Rock Kit 119 SFX Kit 1
113 Electronic Kit 120 SFX Kit 2
114 Analog Kit 121 Sound Effect Kit
115 Dance Kit
Ride Cymbal 1
Tambourine
Cowbell
Vibraslap
Bongo L
Hi-Hat Open
Crash Cymbal 1
Hand Clap
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Open Rim Shot
Side Stick
Castanet
Sticks
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Conga H Open
Timbale L
Agogo L
Maracas
Guiro Short
Claves
Cuica Mute
Tr ia ngle Mute
Shaker
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Splash Cymbal
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Conga H Mute
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Snare H Hard
Floor Tom L
Low Tom
Floor Tom H
Bass Drum Hard
Bass Drum
Snare M
Snare Roll
Snare H Soft
Bass Drum Soft
Seq Click H
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
Conga L
Timbale H
Agogo H
Cabasa
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Long
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Open
Tr iangle Open
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
C3
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 17
Quick Guide
Step
2
Fun Sounds
This instrument also includes a wide range of unique
sound effects. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds!
As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of
a dog barking, running water, a creaking door and many
other unique effects.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
2
Select the Sound Effect kit.
Select Voice number 121 by using the number buttons [0]–[9],
[+], [-].
3
Try out each key.
Try out each key and enjoy the sounds. Don’t forget the black
keys!
You’ll be able to play various sound effects from the keyboard:
barking, braying, yelling, and much more.
After trying out these sounds, press the [PORTABLE GRAND]
button to reset the instrument Voice to the default setting of Voice
“001 Grand Piano.
SE Kit
121
— Quick Guide —
Step 2 Fun Sounds
18 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Step
3
Playing Songs
This instrument has 102 built-in Songs.
Listening to a Song.
1
Press the [SONG] button.
The Song number and name are displayed.
2
Select the desired Song by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Refer to the Song List on next page.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The Song will begin playing.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Select and Listen to a Specific Song
001–102 Built in Songs (see next page)
103–107 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).
108– Songs transferred from a computer on page 67
Cruisin
001
001
Song number Song name
Appears when
the Song mode is
active.
•You can play Songs
recorded from the instru-
ment or transferred from a
computer. The procedure
for playing these Songs is
the same as that of the
built-in Songs.
NOTE
— Quick Guide —
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 19
Quick Guide
Song List
Songs with an asterisk mark (*) are ones which do not have a left part. Therefore, the lesson is applicable only for the right hand.
Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.
•A Song Book is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at
the following website.
http://music.yamaha.com/registration/
Other Operations
[REW] button ........... Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard
during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while
playback is stopped.
[FF] button................ Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the
measure number if pressed while playback is stopped.
[PAUSE] button ........ Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume
playback from the point at which it was stopped.
Using the [DEMO] button
Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001, 002, 003, 004, 025, 041, 064,
084, 081, in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again
from the first Song 001.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button.
No. Song Name
TOP PICKS
001 Cruisin
002 Jessica
003 Castaway
CLASSICAL MELODIES
004*
Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty)
(P. I. Tchaikovsky)
005* Air (Orchestral Suite) (J. S. Bach)
006* Minuetto/Boccherini (L. Boccherini)
007* Siciliano/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach)
008* Menuet (L’Arlésienne) (G. Bizet)
009*
Slavonic Dances op.72-2
(A. Dvorák)
010*
Largo (From the New World)
(A. Dvorák)
011* Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)
012*
Romanze/Beethoven
(L. v. Beethoven)
013* Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
014* Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)
015* Méditation (Thaïs) (J. Massenet)
016* Serenade/Haydn (F. J. Haydn)
017* Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)
018*
Danza dell’Ore (La Gioconda)
(A. Ponchielli)
019*
Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des
Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns)
020*
L’ éléphant (Le Carnaval des
Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns)
021*
Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux)
(C. Saint-Saëns)
022*
Wachet auf, ruft uns die Stimme
BWV. 645 (J. S. Bach)
TRADITIONAL MELODIES
023* Greensleeves (Traditional)
024* Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)
025* Amazing Grace (Traditional)
026* Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)
027* O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)
028* London Bridge (Traditional)
029* Aura Lee (Traditional)
030* Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)
031 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)
032 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)
033 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)
034 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)
035 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)
ˆ
ˆ
036 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)
037 Muffin Man (Traditional)
038 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)
039
When the Saints Go Marching In
(Traditional)
040 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)
041 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)
042
When Irish Eyes Are Smiling
(E. R. Ball)
043 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)
044
Battle Hymn of the Republic
(Traditional)
045 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)
046
I’ve Been Working on the Railroad
(Traditional)
047 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)
048 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)
049 Red River Valley (Traditional)
050 Jingle Bells (J. S. Pierpont)
PIANO SOLO
051 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)
052
Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien”
(F. Chopin)
053
Menuett/Beethoven
(L. v. Beethoven)
054
Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331)
(W. A. Mozart)
055 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)
056
Melodie (Album für die Jugend)
(R. Schumann)
057
Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die
Jugend) (R. Schumann)
058
Von fremden Ländern und
Menschen (Kinderszenen)
(R. Schumann)
059
Träumerei (Kinderszenen)
(R. Schumann)
060
Thema (Impromptus D.935-3)
(F. Schubert)
061 Menuett BWV. Anh.116 (J. S. Bach)
062 Invention Nr.1 (J. S. Bach)
063 Gavotte/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach)
064 Arietta/Grieg (E. Grieg)
065 To a Wild Rose (E. A. MacDowell)
066 Tango/Albeniz (I. Albéniz)
067
La Fille aux Cheveux de Lin
(C. A. Debussy)
068 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)
No. Song Name
069 Pastorale (J. F. Burgmüller)
070
The Last Rose of Summer
(Traditional)
071 Annie Laurie (Traditional)
072
Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair
(S. C. Foster)
073 The Entertainer (S. Joplin)
PIANO ENSEMBLE
074 Londonderry Air (Traditional)
075 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)
076 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)
077 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)
078 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)
079 Loch Lomond (Traditional)
080
Twinkle Twinkle Little Star
(Traditional)
081 Three Blind Mice (Traditional)
082
Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär
(Traditional)
083
Believe Me If All Those Endearing
Young Charms (Traditional)
084 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)
085 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)
086
Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L’adieu”
(F. Chopin)
087
Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod
(J. S. Bach/C. F. Gounod)
088
Jesus bleibet meine Freude
(J. S. Bach)
089 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)
090
Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.
(W. A. Mozart)
091
Der Vogelfänger bin ich ja
(W. A. Mozart)
092
Romanze (Serenade K.525)
(W. A. Mozart)
093
Die Schlittenfahrt K.605-3
(W. A. Mozart)
094 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)
095 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)
096 O Mio Babbino Caro (G. Puccini)
097 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)
098 Frühlingslied (F. Mendelssohn)
099 Ode to Joy (L. v. Beethoven)
100 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)
101 Deck the Halls (Traditional)
102 Silent Night (F. Gruber)
No. Song Name
Step 3 Playing Songs
20 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Step
4
Play with a Style
The Style feature provides backing and rhythm parts in a wide variety of musical categories,
including rock, blues, techno and much more. Here’s how to play a rhythm of a Style. The rhythm
sound consists of percussion instruments.
1
Press the [STYLE] button.
The Style number and name are displayed.
2
Select a Style.
Select the desired Style by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+],
[-].
Refer to the Style List on page 76.
You can also select commercially available Style Files. To do this
load the Style Files from the computer to the instrument, and then
register the style data starting with to style number 107. (Refer to
the information on transferring data on page 67 and registering
styles on page 54.) You can play Style Files in the same way that
you play the internal styles. If the Style File has not been regis-
tered, “No Data” will be displayed when selecting style number
107.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The Style rhythm will start.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Selecting a rhythm of a Style
8BtModrn
001
001
Style number Style name
Appears when
the Style mode is
active.
HH Light
016
Since the Pianist category
Styles (098–106) have no
rhythm parts, no sound will
be produced if you start
rhythm-only playback. To
use these Styles, turn on
the auto accompaniment
and play the keyboard as
described on pages 21–22.
(The bass and chord
accompaniment parts will
sound.)
NOTE
— Quick Guide —
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 21
Quick Guide
On the previous page, you’ve learned how to select your favorite rhythm of a Style. Here, you’ll
learn how to expand on that rhythm with bass and chord backing, and use all of it as your accom-
paniment as you play.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.
2
Turn auto accompaniment on.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button again to turn the auto accom-
paniment off.
3
Turn SYNC START on.
Press the [SYNC START] button.
When the Sync Start standby mode is engaged, Style playback
will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment
range of the keyboard. You can turn off Sync Start standby mode
by pressing the [SYNC START] button.
Playing with a Style
When auto accompaniment is on ...
The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only
chords.
This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.
8BtModrn
001
001
Appears when auto
accompaniment is on
•You can change the Split
Point. Refer to “Setting the
Split Point” on page 46.
NOTE
Split Point (54; F#2)
Auto Accompani-
ment range
8BtModrn
001
001
Flashes when Sync
Start is on.
Step 4 Play with a Style
22 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
4
The Style will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Not sure how to play chords? No problem! This instrument is
capable of playing chords even if you only play one key.
Try playing one, two or three keys (any notes will do) in the auto
accompaniment range of the keyboard. Different keys will pro-
duce different results.
Refer to page 55 for detailed instructions for playing chords.
5
Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with
your right hand.
6
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
Auto Accompani-
ment range
Split Point
Auto Accompani-
ment range
Split Point
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 23
Quick Guide
Step
5
Play Using the Music
Database
You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and
style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music
Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds
and style!
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
A Music Database name will appear in the display.
2
Select a Music Database.
Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page
80 of the manual, use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select
a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song
you intend to play.
For this example select the “051 MoonLit”.
3
Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right.
The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord
to the left of the split point (page 46). Refer to page 55 for infor-
mation about playing chords.
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
AlvFever
001
MoonLit
051
Split Point
— Quick Guide —
Step 5 Play Using the Music Database
24 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Step
6
Play With The Metronome
The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the
tempo that is most comfortable for you.
Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/
OFF] button.
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] but-
ton again.
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to display the tempo.
2
Set the metronome tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
The tempo can be adjusted between 11–280.
Start the metronome
Starting the metronome
Setting the metronome tempo
GrandPno
001
1
1
Displays the
current beat.
Tempo
090
Tempo value
— Quick Guide —
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 25
Quick Guide
In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.
1
Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a
second to select the number of beats per measure function “Time-
SigN”.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the number of beats
per measure.
A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the
other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at
the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”.
The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this exam-
ple.
3
Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times to select the beat
length function “TimeSigD”.
The currently selected beat length will be displayed.
4
Use the [+], [-] to select the beat length.
Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note,
quarter note, eighth note, or 16
th
note). Select 8 for this example.
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat
TimeSigN
04
Number of beats per measure.
Hold for longer
than a second.
The metronome time signa-
ture will synchronize to a
style or song that is playing,
so these parameters cannot
be changed while a style or
song is playing.
NOTE
TimeSigD
04
The length of one beat.
Step 6 Play With The Metronome
26 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “MetroVol”
appears.
2
Set the metronome volume by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Setting the Metronome Volume
MetroVol
100
Metronome Volume
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 27
Quick Guide
Step
7
Record your own
performance
You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers
103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recording.
Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own per-
formance.
1
Press the [REC] button.
After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you
can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the
[STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP
indication is on.
You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button
again ( and stop flashing).
2
Start recording.
When you play the keyboard, recording will begin.
By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto
Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is
recorded with your performance.
When Auto Accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard per-
formance is recorded.
Recording Your Performance
User 1
rEC
001
Flashes
The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song
(Song numbers 103–107) available for record-
ing is displayed. If you want to select the Song
you will be recording, select the desired Song
number by using the [+] and [-] buttons.
•A total of approximately
10,000 notes or 5,500
chord changes can be
recorded to the five User
Songs.
NOTE
Accompaniment cannot be
turned on or off once the
[REC] button is pressed.
NOTE
If all User Songs (Song
numbers 103–107) con-
tain recorded data, Song
103 will automatically be
selected. In this case, you
will record over and erase
any previous data in Song
103, so be careful that
you won’t be erasing any
material you want to
keep!
CAUTION
Split Point
— Quick Guide —
Step 7 Record your own performance
28 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
3
Stop recording.
Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes
the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.)
To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/
STOP] button.
The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you
want to record to.
If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwrit-
ten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new
recording).
Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a
Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a
User Song like that depicted below.
In order to record with the Style, turn the Auto Accompa-
niment to on (see Steps 12 on page 21), and then record
according to the instructions.
In order to record only your performance, turn the Auto Accom-
paniment to off and record according to the normal steps.
Recording to a specified track
About track recording
•Never attempt to turn the
power off when a “Writ-
ing!” message is shown
in the display. Doing so
can damage the flash
memory and result in a
loss of data.
CAUTION
•Keep in mind that any
kind of power failure dur-
ing recording—such as
the power being turned
off, the AC adaptor being
plugged/unplugged or the
batteries running down—
will result in data loss.
CAUTION
Use the Musicsoft
Downloader to backup the
User Songs to a computer
(page 65).
NOTE
(The “ACMP ON” lights.)
(The “ACMP ON” is unlit.)
Record following the steps
in the previous page, and
your performance will be
recorded to Track 1 and the
Style (if you are playing
one) will be recorded to
Tra ck 2.
NOTE
User Song
Recording to the
specified track
* When playing
the Style
Data that can be
recorded to Track 2
Data that can be
recorded to Track 1
Your own keyboard
performance only
Style playback* (including
chord changes) or your
own keyboard performance
•You cannot record the
Reverb Level, metronome
click, or the Transpose and
Tuning settings.
The settings and buttons
below cannot be changed,
or if changed, the new set-
tings cannot be recorded if
entered during the record-
ing process.
ACMP ON/OFF, split
point, reverb type, chorus
type, harmony type,
[FUNCTION] button,
[PORTABLE GRAND]
button, [SOUND
EFFECT KIT] button.
NOTE
Track 1
Your own keyboard
performance
Track 2
Style
Track 1
Your own keyboard
performance
Track 2
Your own keyboard
performance
User Song User Song
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 29
Quick Guide
1
Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off,
depending on what you want to record.
If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you
want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn
ACMP off.
2
Specify the track you want to record.
Specify the track 2 when you want to record the Style.
When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you
can specify either track.
Recording to Track 1
Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 1] button
simultaneously.
Recording to Track 2
Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 2] button
simultaneously.
3
Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record.
If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the
[STYLE] button and select the desired Style.
4
Start recording
Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 27–28.
By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto
Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is
recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the
keyboard (any key is OK) when the Auto Accompaniment is set
to off.
Specifying track recording
•Keep in mind that both Tracks
1 and 2 will be overwritten
with new data if you record
without specifying the tracks.
The both “L” and “R” flashes,
this indicates that you have
specified Track 1 when the
Auto Accompaniment is on. If
you want to record your own
performance, press the
[TRACK 2] button to stop the
“L” flashing. If you want to
record a Style, press the
[REC] button to cancel the
recording, and repeat the pro-
cedure from the beginning.
NOTE
User 1
rEC
001
Flashes when track 1 is
selected for recording.
Press simulta-
neously
User 1
rEC
001
Flashes
when track 2
is selected
for recording.
Lights when recorded data exists.
Tu r ns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute
is set to on (page 40) to turn off playback of the track.
Press simulta-
neously
User 3
rEC
•You can record a new track
while listening to a previously
recorded track (the track indi-
cation will appear). You can
also mute recorded tracks
(the track will disappear)
while recording a new track
by pressing the desired track
button.
NOTE
Step 7 Record your own performance
30 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Deleting an entire User Song
1
Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to
delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
2
Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second.
The Song Delete display appears.
You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] but-
ton.
3
Press the [+/YES] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] but-
ton.
4
Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song.
“Writing!” message will appear while the track is
being deleted.
Deleting User Songs
•You cannot delete a specific
track from a User Song.
NOTE
User 1
103
ClrUser1
YEs
Hold for longer
than a second.
Sure?
YEs
Writing!
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 31
Backup and Initialization
Backup
The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even
when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the
Initialize operation as explained below. You can also save the settings as
backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD)
software. Refer to the section “Transferring a backup file from the PSR-
E313/YPT-310 to a computer” on page 68.
Initialization
This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and
restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures
are provided.
To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory (described above),
turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding
the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased
and the default values restored.
To clear Song data and Style data that has been transferred to the internal
flash memory from a computer, simultaneously hold down the highest
white key and the three highest black keys on the keyboard and turn the
power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch.
Parameters that are saved in backup:
• User Songs
• Style number 107
• Touch Response on/off setting
• The following Function settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch
Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome
Volume, Demo Cancel, Panel Sustain
Backup Clear
Flash Clear
When you execute the
Backup Clear operation,
backup parameters will
be cleared.
CAUTION
When you execute the
Flash Clear operation,
Song data and Style data
you have purchased and
downloaded will also be
cleared. Make sure to
save your important data
by transferring to a com-
puter using Musicsoft
Downloader (page 68).
CAUTION
32 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
GrandPno
001
001
Turn down the volume by turning the
[MASTER VOLUME] control to the left
and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to
turn on the power.
Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again
to turn the power OFF.
Turning the power on
Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.
Adjusting the volume
Rotate coun-
terclockwise
to lower the
volume.
Rotate clock-
wise to
increase the
volume.
Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing
the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start play-
back of the selected Song or Style (rhythm).
About the [START/STOP] button
The “Press & Hold” symbol that
appears next to some buttons indicates
that the button can be pressed and
held for longer than a second to call
up a related or different function.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
Basic Operation and Displays
Basic Operation
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 33
Basic Operation and Displays
When you select a basic function, the name and
number of the currently selected Song, Style and
Voice is shown. From this display, you can select
the desired Song, Style or Voice.
Press a button to select a basic function
Press the [SONG] button to
select a Song.
Press the [STYLE] button to
select a Style.
Press the [VOICE] button to
select a Voice.
The [FUNCTION] button contains
34 settings.
Each time you press the [FUNC-
TION] button, the setting item is
selected in sequence, and the value of
the selected item can be changed in
the display.
Function Settings (page 59)
Number buttons [0]–[9]
The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song,
Style or Voice number or parameter value.
For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first
zeroes can be omitted
[+], [-] buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or
press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press
and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease
the value in the corresponding direction.
Set the number or value
Press number but-
tons [0], [0], [2].
BritePno
002
Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano.
Press briefly to
decrease.
Press briefly to
increase.
34 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation and Displays
GrandPno
001
003
The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range
of indicators that show the on/off status for various functions.
Display
Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song
when the Song lesson function is in use, or the
notes of chords you specify when the Dictio-
nary function is in use. At other times the notes
you play on the keyboard are displayed.
Notation
•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are
indicated by “8va” in the notation.
•For a few specific chords, not all notes may be
shown in the notation section of the display. This is
due to space limitations in the display.
NOTE
Information related to the
Song/recording tracks is shown
here. (See pages 27 and 40.)
Lit: Track contains data
Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data
Flashing: Track is selected as recording track
Indicates the current measure
during playback of a Song.
Indicates the beat of the cur-
rent Style or Song with flash-
ing arrows.
Song/recording track display
Measure
Beat Display
003
Indicates the name of the
chord currently being
played back, or the name of
the chord being played on the keyboard.
Appears when the auto
accompaniment is on.
Indicates notes currently
being played.
Indicates the melody and
chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson
function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a
chord—either when playing a chord or when
using the Dictionary function.
Chord Display
ACMP ON
Keyboard Display
Appears when the Dual func-
tion is on (page 13).
Appears when the Harmony
function is on (page 42).
Appears when the Split func-
tion is on (page 14).
Appears when Reverb is on
(page 43).
Appears when Touch
Response is on (page 45).
DUAL
HARMONY
SPLIT
REVERB
TOUCH RESPONSE
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 35
Song Lesson
Yamaha Education Suite 5
You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands
lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. Songs that
can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to
flash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 65). The procedure for transferring songs
are described on page 67.
Lesson Flow
The practice methods:
Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ........ Listen and learn the melody or rhythm of a selected Song.
Lesson 2 (Timing) ...................... Learn to play the notes at the correct timing along with the Song.
Lesson 3 (Waiting)..................... Learn to play the correct notes.
Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn)
There’s no need to play the keyboard in Lesson 1.
The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should
learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it
well.
1 Select the desired Song for your lesson.
Press the [SONG] button, and then select a Song (referring to the Song
list on page 19) by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-]. If you
want to practice a Song you’ve transferred from a computer, select one
of the Songs beginning from Song number 108.
The instrument includes 102 built in Songs. Some Songs (as shown
below) are intended for use as right-hand lessons, and cannot be used
for left-hand or both-hands lessons.
Songs for right-hand lesson
Song numbers: 004–030
Select a Song
for your lesson.
Select the part you want
to practice.
Select the practice
method.
Start the
Lesson!
User Songs cannot be used
for the lesson.
NOTE
•You cannot select the part
during Song playback
before Lesson 1 starts. If a
Song is currently being
played back, stop the Song
first, then continue from
Step
2.
NOTE
Chevaler
068
001
Song Lesson
36 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
2 Select the part you want to practice.
Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand
lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-
hands lesson. The selected part is displayed.
A “No LPart” message is shown in the display if you select the left part
in one of the Songs 004–030, which do not have left part data. These
Songs cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons.
3 Start Lesson 1.
Press the [LISTEN & LEARN] button to start Lesson 1.
The melody of the part you selected in Step
2 will sound. Listen to it
carefully and learn it well.
4 Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Right
Left
BothHand
Both-hands lesson
Right-hand lessonLeft-hand lesson
•For songs transferred from
a computer, the “No LPart”
indication does not appear,
even when there is no left
hand part in the song.
NOTE
No LPart
•Even after Lesson 1 has
started and the Song is
playing, you can still select
the part.
When the melody Voice of
the Song is changed, the
key position shown in the
display may be shifted (in
octave units), depending on
the Voice selected.
•You can select Lessons 1–3
by pressing the [LISTEN &
LEARN], [TIMING] and
[WAITING] buttons, respec-
tively.
NOTE
LISTEN
r1
011
The notation and key positions of the model
melody are shown in the display.
Song Lesson
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 37
Lesson 2 (Timing)
In this lesson, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply
concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompa-
niment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long
as you play in time with the rhythm.
1 Select a Song for your lesson.
2 Select the part you want to prac-
tice.
3 Start Lesson 2.
Press the [TIMING] button to start Lesson 2.
Play the notes shown in the display.
In Lesson 2, simply play each note in time with the music.
4 Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any
time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
When the lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode 2 or
3, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very
Good, or Excellent.
OK
Good
Very0Good
Excellent
Grade
•You cannot use Dual or Split Voices
during lessons.
The Split Point is fixed and it can-
not be changed. For the left-hand
lesson, it is fixed at 59 or B2; for
the left-hand chord lesson, it is
fixed at 54 or F
#
2.
NOTE
•You cannot select the part during
Song playback before Lesson 2
starts. If a Song is currently being
played back, stop the Song first,
then continue from Step
2.
NOTE
•Even after Lesson 2 has started
and the Song is playing, you can
still select the part.
NOTE
TIMING
r2
004
Song Lesson
38 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Lesson 3 (Waiting)
In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play
appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until
you play the right note.
1 Select a Song for your lesson.
2 Select the part you want to practice.
3 Start Lesson 3.
Press the [WAITING] button to start Lesson 3.
Play the notes shown in the display.
Try playing the correct notes.
4 Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
•You cannot select the part
during Song playback
before Lesson 3 starts. If a
Song is currently being
played back, stop the Song
first, then continue from
Step
2.
NOTE
•Even after Lesson 3 has
started and the Song is
playing, you can still select
the part.
NOTE
WAITING
r3
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 39
Song settings
Changing the Melody Voice
You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer.
1 Select the Song and play it.
Refer to the section “Playing Songs” on page 18.
2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–
[9], [+], [-].
The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard.
If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press
the [START/STOP] button to start playback again.
3 Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a sec-
ond.
“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds,
indicating that the Voice selected in Step
2 has replaced the Song’s
original melody Voice.
Song Volume
This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Song playback
and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the play-
back sound.
1 Press the [SONG] button.
•You cannot change the mel-
ody Voice of a User Song.
NOTE
HnkyTonk
004
001
Hold for longer than a second.
Song settings
40 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until
“SongVol” appears.
3 Set the Song Volume by pressing the number buttons
[0]–[9], [+], [-].
Mute
You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback.
•Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during
Song playback.
•Track 2 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during
Song playback.
You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track but-
tons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by select-
ing any other Song.
Current Song Volume Song Volume
SongVol
100
Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to its default
setting (100).
NOTE
Lit—track contains
data.
Unlit—track is muted
or contains no data.
Cruisin
001
010
Pressing one of the Track but-
tons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2]
will mute the corresponding
track during Song playback.
Song settings
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 41
Practice Makes Perfect
You can repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. This function lets
you specify a section of a Song you want to practice—“A” is the start point
and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback.
1 Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of
the section you want to repeat (the “A” point).
A-REPEAT” will be displayed.
2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section
you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B section of the
Song will now play repeatedly, letting you practice the section over and
over.
You can stop repeat playback by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.
The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the
Song will continue.
AB
Repeat playback of this section
The repeat start and end
points can be specified in
one-measure increments.
•You can also set the A-B
Repeat function when the
Song is stopped. Simply
use the [REW] and [FF] but-
tons to select the desired
measures, pressing the [A-
B REPEAT] button for each
point, then start playback.
If you want to set the start
point “A” at the very begin-
ning of the Song press the
[A-B REPEAT] button
before starting playback of
the Song.
NOTE
REPEAT
A-
REPEAT
A-b
The A-B Repeat function
will be canceled when you
select another Song or
Style mode.
NOTE
REPEAT
oFF
42 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Play With a Variety of Effects
Adding Harmony
This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the
Main Voice.
1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn harmony on.
When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY
ON/OFF] button again to turn Harmony off.
2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a
second.
“HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the
Harmony Type.
3 Select a desired Harmony Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9],
[+], [-].
Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81.
Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and
operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section
“How to sound each Harmony Type” on the next page as well as the
Harmony Type List for details.
When you press the [HAR-
MONY ON/OFF] button to
turn this feature on, the
appropriate Harmony type
for the currently selected
Main Voice is automatically
selected.
NOTE
Appears when harmony is on.
•You can also access the
Harmony Type setting dis-
play by pressing the
[FUNCTION] button sev-
eral times.
Harmony will be turned off if
the Chord Dictionary func-
tion is used.
NOTE
Trio
02
Currently selected
Harmony type
Hold for longer
than a second.
Play With a Variety of Effects
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 43
Adding Reverb
Reverb adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound that you
play on the keyboard.
Press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button to turn Reverb on. Reverb is normally
on. You can check how the selected Reverb Type sounds by playing the key-
board. To turn Reverb off, press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button again.
The ideal type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or
Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb Types.
1 Press and hold the [REVERB ON/OFF] button for longer than a sec-
ond. “REVERB” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by
the Reverb Type.
How to sound each Harmony Type
To add Reverb
Select a Reverb Type
The harmony notes can be
added only to the Main
Voice, not to Dual or Split
Voices.
The keys left of the Split
Point of the keyboard pro-
duce no harmony notes
when the auto accompani-
ment is on (ACMP ON is lit).
NOTE
Harmony type 01–05
Harmony type 06–12 (Trill)
Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo)
Harmony type 20–26 (Echo)
You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 59).
Press the right-hand keys while play-
ing chords in the auto accompaniment
range of the keyboard when the Auto
Accompaniment is on (page 21).
Hold down two keys.
Keep holding down the keys.
Keep holding down the keys.
Appears when
Reverb is on.
Hall2
02
Currently selected Reverb Type
Hold for longer
than a second.
Play With a Variety of Effects
44 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
2 Select the desired Reverb Type by using the num-
ber buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81 for
details.
You can adjust the Reverb depth in the Function
Settings (page 59).
Adding Chorus
This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. The
best-suited Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a
Voice; however, you can select any of the available types.
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Chorus”
appears.
“Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the
Chorus Type.
2
Select a desired Chorus Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81 for details.
You can adjust the Chorus depth independently for the Main, Dual and
Split Voices in the Function Settings (page 59).
Adding Panel Sustain
This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices.
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Sustain”
item appears.
2 Press the [+] button to turn the Panel Sustain on.
Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play on the keyboard
when the Panel Sustain is on. To turn it off, press the [-] button.
•You can also access the
Reverb Type setting display
by pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button several times.
NOTE
Currently selected
Chorus Type
Chorus1
1
Sustain
oFF
Current setting
See the section “Connect-
ing a footswitch (SUSTAIN
Jack)” on page 9 for infor-
mation on applying sustain
with the optional footswitch.
NOTE
Sustain
on
On
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 45
Handy Performance Features
Touch Response Sensitivity
Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn Touch Response on.
When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes accord-
ing to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press
the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button again to turn the Touch Response off. When
Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how
hard you play the keys.
When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sensitivity of the keyboard
in response to keyboard dynamics in three steps. Higher values produce
greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—in
other words, greater sensitivity.
1 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.
“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the
current Touch Sensitivity value.
2 Select a Touch Sensitivity setting between 1 and 3 by using the number
buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Touch Response
Setting the Touch Sensitivity
Appears when Touch
Response is on.
The Touch Response func-
tion cannot be used for
some Voices (such as
organ), even if the Touch
Response icon appears in
the display.
NOTE
Currently selected Touch Sensitivity
Medium
2
Hold for longer
than a second.
Handy Performance Features
46 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Setting the Split Point
The Split Point setting can be changed as desired.
The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can
change it to another key. When you change the Split Point, the auto accom-
paniment range also changes.
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SplitPnt”
appears.
2 Set the Split Point by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Transpose
The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maxi-
mum of 1 octave in semitone increments.
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Transpos”
appears.
2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to set the
Transpose value between -12 and +12 as
required.
36 48 60 72 84 96
Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2)
Currently selected Split Point
Split Point
Split Point
SplitPnt
054
001
Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to its default
setting (54 or F
#
2).
NOTE
Current transpose value
Transpos
00
The pitch of the Drum Kits
Voices (Voice numbers
109–121) cannot be
changed.
Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to its default
setting (00).
NOTE
Handy Performance Features
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 47
Tuning
You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. The overall tuning of
the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-
cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “Tuning”
appears.
2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to set the Tuning value
between -100 and +100 as required.
One Touch Setting
Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be
confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most
suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice
number “000” to activate this feature.
1 Press the [VOICE] button, and then select Voice number “000” by
using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
This turns the One Touch Setting feature on. One Touch Setting will be
turned off if you select any other Voice number.
Currently tuning value
Tuning
000
The pitch of the Drum Kits
Voices (Voice numbers
109–121) cannot be
changed.
Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to its default
setting (000).
NOTE
Appears when One Touch Setting is on.
SprnoSax
000
Handy Performance Features
48 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Changing the tempo of the Song/Style
Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow.
1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the dis-
play after selecting a Style/Song.
2 Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
You can also set the Tempo by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] but-
ton at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and
three times for time signatures in 3.
You can change the Tempo during Style/Song playback by pressing the
[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice.
Adjusting the Voice Parameters
The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can be shifted by up or
down in octaves) and Chorus Send Level can be individually adjusted for
the Main, Dual, and Split Voices.
You can adjust each of the parameters above in the Function settings (page
59).
Main Voice Parameters (page 59)
• Main Voice Volume
• Main Voice Octave
• Main Voice Chorus Send Level
Dual Voice Parameters (page 60)
• Dual Voice Volume
• Dual Voice Octave
• Dual Voice Chorus Send Level
Split Voice Parameters (page 60)
• Split Voice Volume
• Split Voice Octave
• Split Voice Chorus Send Level
Current Tempo value
Tempo
116
Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to the
default tempo of a Style or
Song.
NOTE
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 49
Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions
Various ways to start and stop Style playback
The following three methods can be used to start Style playback. In all
cases you will need to press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto
accompaniment on before actually starting Style playback. Whichever
method you choose, you can press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] before
starting playback. To begin your performance, an introduction will play
automatically, then will automatically switch to the MAIN section when
finished.
Immediate Start
Press the [START/STOP] button to begin rhythm-only playback of the
selected Style.
The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in
the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Chord Start
Press the [SYNC START] button and the beat arrows will begin flash-
ing, indicating that the Sync Start “standby” mode has been engaged.
The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in
the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Tap Start
You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Sim-
ply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signa-
tures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Style
rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo.
The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in
the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Starting Style playback
Appears when the auto
accompaniment is on
Immediate Start
Sync Start standby
Style playback begins when
you play a chord
GrandPno
001
001
Accompani-
ment range
Start at the
tapped tempo
Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions
50 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
The following three methods can be used to stop Style playback.
Immediate Stop
Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button.
Stop and Enter Sync Start Mode
If you press the [SYNC START] button during Style playback, playback
will stop immediately and the Sync Start standby mode will be engaged
(beat arrows will flash).
Play the Ending and Stop
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending sec-
tion. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through.
If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the
ending is playing), the ending will play in ritardando (the tempo will
gradually get slower).
Stopping Style playback
Immediate Stop
Sync Start standby
GrandPno
001
001
Stop immediately and
enter the Sync Start
mode
Stop after ending plays
Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 51
Pattern Variation (Sections)
The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” (patterns) that allow you to
vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing.
1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.
2 Turn auto accompaniment on.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.
3 Turn SYNC START on.
Press the [SYNC START] button.
INTRO section
This is used for the beginning of the Song
When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section.
The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
MAIN section
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats
indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and
B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.
Fill-in section
This is automatically added before changing the section A and B.
ENDING section
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops
automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
Intro Main A/B
Auto fillEnding
Appears when the auto accompani-
ment is on.
Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions
52 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro
of the selected Style starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For informa-
tion on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto Accompaniment
Chords” on page 55.
7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main
section A/B.
8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
This switches to the ending section.
When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automati-
cally. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is
playing back.
MAIN A
The name of the selected section—MAIN A
or MAIN B—will be displayed
INTRO≥A
Accompani-
ment range
FILL A≥B
ENDING
Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 53
Adjusting the Style Volume
This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Style playback
and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the play-
back sound.
1 Press the [STYLE] button.
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the
“StyleVol” appears.
3 Set the Style volume by using the number buttons [0]–
[9], [+], [-].
StyleVol
100
Current Style volume setting Style Volume
Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to its default
setting (100).
NOTE
Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions
54 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Registering Style Files
This instrument features 106 internal styles, but other styles, such as those
which can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix),
can be registered into style number 107 and used in the same way as the
internal styles.
In order to use the style file register function, the file must already have
been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for
transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 65
(“Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer”).
The procedure described below registers a style file that has already been
transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 107.
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button as many time as necessary
to select the style file load function “StyleReg”.
After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable style file will appear
in the display.
If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument,
you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence.
2 Execute the register operation.
With the name of the style file you want to register shown in the dis-
play, press the number [0] button.
3 A confirmation message for the register operation will
appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the
file.
StyleReg
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 55
Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords
You’ve learned in the section “Play with a Style (Accompaniment)” on page 20 that the
“feel” of the Style changes every time you play a chord on the left-hand side of the key-
board. Here, you’ll learn the types of the chords and how to play them in greater detail.
The examples of chords are given here in the key of C.
There are two basic ways (below) you can play the chords on the left-hand side of the
keyboard, while playing the Style (page 21)
Easy Chords
Standard Chords
Easy Chords
This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the
keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers.
Standard Chords
This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using
normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
36 48 60 72 84 96
Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2)
Root notes and the corre-
sponding keys
NOTE
Accompaniment range
C
Cm
C
7
Cm
7
•To play a major chord
Press the root note of
the chord.
•To play a minor chord
Press the root note
together with the near-
est black key to the left
of it.
•To play a seventh chord
Press the root note together
with the nearest white key to
the left of it.
To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together
with the nearest white and
black keys to the left of it
(three keys altogether).
C
Cm
7
C
( )
CM
( )
7
C
(9)
C
( )
(9)
6
Caug
Cm
6
Cm
7
( )
Cm
b5
7
CmM
b5
7
Cm
( )
(9)
7
Cm
(9)
CmM
7
( )
CmM
(9)
7
( )
Cdim
Cdim
7
C
(9)
7
( )
C
(13)
7
( )
C
(b9)
7
( )
C
(b13)
7
Csus
4
C
1+2+5
C
b5
7
C
6
( )
( )
CM
7
(9)
7
CM
(#11)
( )
7
CM
b5
C
(b5)
( )
C
(#11)
7
C
(#9)
7
( )
C aug
7
Cm
7
(
11)
( )
( )
CM aug
7
( )
C sus
4
7
( )
* Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them.
Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords
56 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Recognized Standard Chords Chart
* These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function.
Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display
Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C C
Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C(9) C(9)
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6
Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) *
Major seventh [M7]
1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - 7
CM7 CM7
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) *
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
CM7(#11) CM7(#11)*
Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C(b5) Cb5 *
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 *
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4 Csus4
Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug
Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug *
Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm
Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9)
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9)
Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) *
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) *
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 *
Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7
Seventh [7]
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
C7 C7
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9)
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13)
Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9)
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
C7(#11) C7(#11)
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13)
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9)
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7b5C7b5 *
Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4
One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C1+2+5 C *
Notes in parentheses can
be omitted.
Playing two same root keys
in the adjacent octaves pro-
duces accompaniment
based only on the root.
•A perfect fifth (1+5) pro-
duces accompaniment
based only on the root and
fifth which can be used with
both major and minor
chords.
The chord fingerings listed
are all in “root” position, but
other inversions can be
used—with the following
exceptions: m7, m7
b
5, 6,
m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7
b
5,
6(9), 1+2+5
•Inversion of the 7sus4 and
m7(11) chords are not rec-
ognized if the notes shown
in parentheses are omitted.
The auto accompaniment
will sometimes not change
when related chords are
played in sequence (e.g.
some minor chords fol-
lowed by the minor sev-
enth).
•Two-note fingerings will pro-
duce a chord based on the
previously played chord.
NOTE
Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 57
Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that
shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the
name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.
1 Press and hold the [WAITING] button for longer than a second.
“Dict.” will appear in the display.
2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh)
chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled
“ROOT .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown
in the display.
3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard
labeled “CHORD TYPE .” (The note doesn’t sound.)
The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord
type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard
diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons.
4 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the key-
board, checking the indications in the display.
When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your suc-
cess and the chord name in the display flashes.
Dict.
Hold for longer
than a second.
>
Dict.
001
Keys for root
dictionary
Keys for chord type
dictionary
Major chords are usually
indicated by the root name
only. For example, the indi-
cation “C” in a score refers
to a “C Major” chord. To
look up the fingering for a
major chord press the root
key and then the M chord
type key.
NOTE
>
Dict.
001
Individual notes of chord
(keyboard)
Notation of chord
Chord name (root
and type)
Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords
58 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
About chords
Playing two or more notes together simultaneously creates a “chord.
Playing a note together with two other notes spaced three notes (steps) apart—such as the
notes C, E and G—creates a harmonious sound. Chords like these are called “triads” and
they play an important role in most music.
Taking the chord above as an example, the lowest note of this triad is called the “root note.” This is the central note
sound, and it supports or anchors the rest of the notes chord.
You’ll notice that the middle note of the chord above (E) is the third step in the succession of scale notes—C, D, then E.
There are two types of “thirds” in chords: major thirds and minor thirds.
Well also alter the top note of our original chord and make three additional chords, as shown below. (The captions indi-
cate the intervals between each of the notes.)
The basic characteristics of the chord sound are same, no matter if we change the order of the notes from bottom to top,
or if we add other same name notes in different octaves. Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner, and
emotional music can be created by playing different chords one after the other according to commonly accepted rules.
Harmony determines the nature of chords, and music is created based on harmony.
Chord names
From the chord name, you can tell at a glance what type of chord it is and which notes
make up the chord. Understanding the basic structure of chords is very useful—once
you’re familiar with this, you’ll be quickly and easily play chords by looking at the
names that appear above the notation.
Chord types (These chords are among those that can be recognized by the Fingered method.)
3rd
Root
3rd
Minor third—three half steps from the rootMajor third—four half steps from the root
Major chord
C
M
C
m
C
aug
C
dim
Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd
Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord
Root note
Cm
Chord type
C
sus4
Suspended 4
th
Perfect 5
th
Perfect 4
th
C
7
7
th
Flatted 7
th
Major chord
C
m7
Minor 7
th
Flatted 7
th
Minor chord
C
M7
Major 7
th
Major 7
th
Major chord
C
mM7
Minor/major 7
th
Major 7
th
Minor chord
C
7
(
b5
)
7
th
, flatted 5
th
Flatted 5
th
7
th
chord
C
m7
(
b5
)
Minor 7
th
, flatted 5
th
Flatted 5
th
C
7sus4
7
th
, suspended 4
th
Flatted 7
th
Suspended 4
th
chordMinor 7
th
chord
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 59
Function Settings
The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjust-
ing or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices.
Select the item and change the value
There are 34 different items that can be set.
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until
desired item appears.
Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed 34 function items are
displayed in sequence. The description and display sample is provided
on the Function Setting List on page 59–60.
2 Set the value by using the number but-
tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
For on/off settings or the PC Mode setting, use
[+]/[-] buttons.
Function Setting List
Item Display Range/settings Description
Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.
Song Volume
SongVol
000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.
Transpose
TransPos
-12–00–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone incre-
ments.
Tuning
Tuning
-100–000–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.
Split Point
SplitPnt
000–127
(C-2–G8)
Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the
Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split
(lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and
Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the
same value.
Touch Sensitivity
TouchSns
1 (Soft)
2 (Medium)
3 (Hard)
When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of
the feature.
Style Register
StyleReg
001–nnn Select and register a style file from flash files that are loaded
from computer.
Main Voice Volume
M.Volume
000–127 Determines the volume of the Main Voice.
Main Voice Octave
M.Octave
-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.
Main Voice Chorus
Send Level
M.Chorus
000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
StyleVol
100
Value Function item
Function Settings
60 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Dual Voice
D.Voice
001–482 Selects the Dual Voice.
Dual Voice Volume
D.Volume
000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.
Dual Voice Octave
D.Octave
-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.
Dual Voice Chorus Send
Level
D.Chorus
000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Split Voice
S.Voice
001–482 Selects the Split Voice.
Split Voice Volume
S.Volume
000–127 Determines the volume of the Split Voice.
Split Voice Octave
S.Octave
-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.
Split Voice Chorus Send
Level
S.Chorus
000–127 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Reverb Type
Reverb
01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10).
Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81.
Reverb Level
RevLevel
000–127 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the
Reverb effect.
Chorus Type
Chorus
1–5 Determines the Chorus Type, including off (05).
Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81.
Panel Sustain
Sustain
ON/OFF Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to
the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continu-
ously when ON, or not applied when OFF.
Harmony Type
HarmType
01–26 Determines the Harmony Type.
Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81.
Harmony Volume
HarmVol
000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when Harmony
type 1–5 is selected.
PC Mode
PC0mode
OFF/PC1/PC2 Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer
(page 63).
Local On/Off
Local
ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the
internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF).
External Clock
ExtClock
ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-
nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON).
Initial Setup Send
InitSend
YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.
Use the [+] button to transmit the data.
Time Signature
Numerator
TimeSigN
00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
Time Signature
Denominator
TimeSigD
Half note, Quarter
note, Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
Sets the length of each metronome beat.
Metronome Volume
MetroVol
000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Lesson Track (R)
R-Part
01–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-
ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Trans-
ferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68.
Lesson Track (L)
L-Part
01–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-
ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Trans-
ferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68
Demo Cancel
D-Cancel
ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When
this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the
[DEMO] button is pressed.
Item Display Range/settings Description
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 61
About MIDI
The instrument features a MIDI terminals that can be connected to other MIDI instru-
ments and devices for expanded musical functionality.
What is MIDI?
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface
for communication between electronic musical instruments and music
devices. When MIDI-equipped instruments are connected via a MIDI
cable, it becomes possible to transfer performance and setting data between
them for significantly enhanced performance and production potential.
What You Can Do With MIDI
•Transferring performance and setting data between the PSR-E313/YPT-
310 and MIDI-equipped instruments or computers. (page 62)
•Transferring the data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and computers.
(page 65)
Connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to external equipment only after turning off
power for all devices. Then, turn on the power, first to the PSR-E313/YPT-310,
then to the connected external equipment.
CAUTION
About MIDI
62 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument
By connecting the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to other MIDI devices or a computer,
the performance data of the instrument can be used on those other MIDI
devices or computer, and also the performance data from other MIDI devices
and computer can be received and sounded with the PSR-E313/YPT-310.
When the instrument is connected with another MIDI device, it
transmits/receives performance data.
When the instrument is connected with a computer, it transmits/
receives performance data.
MIDI settings
These settings should be made when transmitting/receiving performance
data to a connected MIDI device or computer.
Local Control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument
are sounded by its internal tone generator system; the internal tone genera-
tor is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off.
On ........ This is the normal setting in which notes played on the instru-
ment’s keyboard are sounded by the internal tone generator
system. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal
will also be played by the internal tone generator.
Off ....... With this setting the instrument itself produces no sound
(keyboard performance, Harmony, or Style playback), but the
performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data
received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be
played by the internal tone generator.
You can set the Local Control in the Function Settings (page 59).
Local Settings
MIDI device
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
PSR-E313/
YPT-310
A USB-MIDI interface
(such as the Yamaha UX16)
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
USB
PSR-E313/
YPT-310
If you can’t get any sound
out of the instrument, Local
Control may be the most
likely cause. Playing the
keyboard results in no
sound when Local is set to
OFF.
NOTE
About MIDI
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 63
These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own
internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON).
On......... The instrument’s time based functions will be synchronized
to the clock from an external device connected to the MIDI
terminal.
Off ........ The instrument uses its own internal clock (default).
You can set the External Clock in the Function Settings (page 59).
The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as
shown below). The selections are PC1, PC2 and OFF.
The chart of PC Settings
* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook.
Digital Music Notebook is a major new multimedia platform for music tuition and
performance. Visit the website below for more information on the latest version of
Digital Music Notebook and how to install it.
www.digitalmusicnotebook.com
** Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during
Song playback.
*** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during
Style playback.
**** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted
(ON) or not (OFF).
1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up
the PC Mode.
2 Select PC1, PC2, or OFF by using the [+], [-] buttons.
External Clock Settings
PC Mode
PC1 PC2* OFF
LOCAL Off Off On
EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off
SONG OUT** Off Off On
STYLE OUT*** Off Off On
KEYBOARD OUT**** Off On On
If External Clock is ON and
no clock signal is being
received from an external
device, the Song, Style, and
metronome functions will
not start.
NOTE
Song Out, Style Out and
Keyboard Out can only be
changed by the PC set-
ting. They cannot be set
independently.
User Songs can be used
with Song Out.
NOTE
PC mode
oFF
Hold for longer
than a second.
About MIDI
64 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital
Music Notebook application on your computer (via the MIDI connection)
—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel.
Remote control keys
PSR-E313/YPT-310: To use the remote control functions, simultaneously
hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the
appropriate key (shown below).
Sends the PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings to an external MIDI device.
When recording a PSR-E313/YPT-310 performance to an external
sequencer or similar equipment, you can use this function to send the cur-
rent PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings so that when the sequence is played
back the original panel settings are automatically restored.
You can set Initial Send in the Function settings (page 59).
Remote Control of MIDI Devices
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Panel Setting Transmission (Initial Send)
Remote control of MIDI
devices will function inde-
pendently of the PC2 mode.
NOTE
C1
C#1
C6: Fast forward
B5: Start
A5: Stop
G5: Rewind
F5: Top (move to the beginning of
the song)
E5: Metronome ON/OFF
About MIDI
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 65
Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer
The PSR-E313/YPT-310 includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but
you can load other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in
the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is
SMF format 0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format).
Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning with 108 and
one of the loaded style/s can be registered as the 107th style.
In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to
use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft
Downloader application.
* The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible
sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI
sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.
You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the fol-
lowing website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
The minimum computer requirements for Musicsoft
Downloader operation are as follows:
• OS : Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/
XP Professional
• CPU : 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron®
processor family (500 MHz or more is recommended)
• Memory : 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended)
• Hard Disk : at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free
space is recommended)
• Display : 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit)
• Other : Microsoft® Internet Explorer®5.5 or higher
Installing Musicsoft Downloader
Visit the Yamaha website for
more information on the lat-
est version of Musicsoft
Downloader (version 5.4.0
or higher) and how to install
it.
NOTE
About MIDI
66 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
After installing the Musicsoft Downloader application on your computer,
connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 as described below.
A Yamaha UX16 or similar USB-MIDI interface (sold separately) will be
necessary for MIDI connection between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a
USB-equipped computer.
Make sure to purchase a Yamaha UX16 or a quality USB-MIDI interface at
a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store.
If you use the UX16 interface, install the driver supplied with the interface
on your computer.
Connecting a personal computer
A USB-MIDI interface
(such as the Yamaha UX16)
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
USB
PSR-E313/
YPT-310
About MIDI
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 67
You can transmit Song files and Style Files from your com-
puter to the Flash Memory on your PSR-E313/YPT-310. For
details about how to transmit Song file and Style File using
the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online
help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and
Instrument (for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft
Downloader.
Data that can be loaded to the PSR-E313/YPT-
310 from a computer
• Songs : 99 Songs max (Song numbers 108–)
• Data : 373 kilobytes
• Data Format : SMF Format 0
• File : 07PK3.BUP (Backup file)
: ***.mid (MIDI Song)
: ***.sty (Style File)
Transferring a file from a computer
The Musicsoft Downloader application may not
be able to access the instrument in the follow-
ing cases:
During Style playback
During Song playback
NOTE
Use the power adaptor when transferring
data. The data can be corrupted if the bat-
teries fail during the transfer.
•Never turn the power off and never plug/
unplug the AC power adaptor during data
transmission. Not only will the data fail to
be transferred and saved, but operation of
the flash memory may become unstable
and its contents may disappear completely
when the power is turned on or off.
CAUTION
Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft
Downloader and re-enable control of the instru-
ment.
NOTE
Destination
About MIDI
68 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
You can transfer backup data (page 31) to a computer as a
“backup file” by using Musicsoft Downloader. For details
about how to transmit backup files using the Musicsoft
Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic
“Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument
(for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader.
Data that can be transferred to a computer from the PSR-E313/YPT-310
Backup file (07PK3.BUP: backup data containing five User Songs)
Songs transferred from a computer
Transferring a backup file from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to a computer
Erasing Transferred Song Data from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 Memory
To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use “flash clear” function on page 31.
To erase specific Songs transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader.
Using Transferred Songs for Lessons
In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which
channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson
Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 60. The procedure for setting the “guide track” is as follows:
Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press
the
[FUNCTION] button a number of times until
the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the
channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part.
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.
Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from
the PSR-E313/YPT-310.
Do not rename the backup file on the com-
puter. If you do so, it will not be recognized
when transferred to the instrument.
NOTE
The backup data, including the five User
Songs is transmitted/received as a single
file. As a result, all backup data (including
the five Songs) will be overwritten every
time you transmit or receive. Keep this in
mind when transferring data.
CAUTION
Click here to display the backup file
at the bottom of the window.
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 69
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a
popping sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical
power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is pro-
duced.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce
interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further
away from the instrument.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is
played or when a Song or Style is being
played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the
rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound
is output.
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 62.)
Playing keys in the right hand area of the
keyboard does not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 57), the keys in the right hand
area are used only for entering the chord root and type.
The volume is too soft.
The sound quality is poor.
The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not
play.
The recorded data of the Song, etc. does
not play correctly.
The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and
all panel settings are reset.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely
new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.
The Style or Song does not play back when
the [START/STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;
refer to “External Clock Settings” on page 63.
The Style does not sound properly.
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 53) is set to an appropriate level.
Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing?
Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 46).
Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing
press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
No rhythm accompaniment plays when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed after
selecting Style number 098–106 (Pianist).
This is not a malfunction. Style number 098–106 (Pianist) have no
rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing
when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if
auto accompaniment is turned on.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the
sound seems to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual
voice or Split voice is being used and a style or Song is playing back at
the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the
accompaniment or Song.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to pro-
duce the opposite effect. For example, press-
ing the footswitch cuts off the sound and
releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch
plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the
power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to
note.
This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple record-
ings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus,
the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
The ACMP ON indicator does not appear
when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any
style-related function.
The harmony doesn’t sound.
The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending
on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on
and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the
keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony
effect. For Types 06–26, turning the Auto Accompaniment on or off has
no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for
Types 06–12.
The part indications, such as Right, Left and
Both Hands, do not appear—even when
pressing the [R] or [L] buttons for the Lesson.
Make sure that you are not pressing the [R] or [L] buttons while the Song
is playing. If you press one of the part buttons while playing the Song
and before starting the Lesson, these buttons serve to mute the corre-
sponding Song tracks. Stop the Song first, then select the desired part
and start the Lesson.
70 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that
it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of
what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of
the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total
number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is corre-
spondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song
functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played
notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last
note priority).
Panel Voice List
The Voice List includes MIDI program
change numbers for each voice. Use these
program change numbers when playing the
instrument via MIDI from an external device.
•Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate
to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to
127. That is, Program Numbers and Program
Change Numbers differ by a value of 1.
Remember to take this into consideration.
Some voices may sound continuously or
have a long decay after the notes have been
released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)
is held.
NOTE
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
001 0 112 1 Grand Piano
002 0 112 2 Bright Piano
003 0 112 7 Harpsichord
004 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano
005 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano
006 0 113 3 CP 80
E.PIANO
007 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
008 0 113 6 Hyper Tines
009 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano
010 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano
011 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano
012 0 112 8 Clavi
ORGAN
013 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1
014 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2
015 0 112 19 Rock Organ
016 0 114 19 Purple Organ
017 0 112 18 Click Organ
018 0 116 17 Bright Organ
019 0 127 19 Theater Organ
020 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ
021 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ
022 0 113 20 Chapel Organ
023 0 112 20 Church Organ
024 0 112 21 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
025 0 112 22 Musette Accordion
026 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion
027 0 113 24 Bandoneon
028 0 112 23 Harmonica
GUITAR
029 0 112 25 Classical Guitar
030 0 112 26 Folk Guitar
031 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar
032 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar
033 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar
034 0 112 28 Clean Guitar
035 0 113 27 Octave Guitar
036 0 112 29 Muted Guitar
037 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar
038 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar
BASS
039 0 112 34 Finger Bass
040 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass
041 0 112 35 Pick Bass
042 0 112 36 Fretless Bass
043 0 112 37 Slap Bass
044 0 112 39 Synth Bass
045 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass
046 0 113 40 Dance Bass
STRINGS
047 0 112 49 String Ensemble
048 0 112 50 Chamber Strings
049 0 113 50 Slow Strings
050 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings
051 0 112 51 Synth Strings
052 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings
053 0 112 41 Violin
054 0 112 43 Cello
055 0 112 44 Contrabass
056 0 112 47 Harp
057 0 112 106 Banjo
058 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
059 0 112 53 Choir
060 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble
061 0 112 55 Air Choir
062 0 112 54 Vox Humana
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 71
SAXOPHONE
063 0 112 67 Tenor Sax
064 0 112 66 Alto Sax
065 0 112 65 Soprano Sax
066 0 112 68 Baritone Sax
067 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
068 0 112 72 Clarinet
069 0 112 69 Oboe
070 0 112 70 English Horn
071 0 112 71 Bassoon
TRUMPET
072 0 112 57 Trumpet
073 0 112 58 Trombone
074 0 113 58 Trombone Section
075 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet
076 0 112 61 French Horn
077 0 112 59 Tuba
BRASS
078 0 112 62 Brass Section
079 0 113 62 Big Band Brass
080 0 113 63 80’s Brass
081 0 119 62 Mellow Horns
082 0 114 63 Techno Brass
083 0 112 63 Synth Brass
FLUTE
084 0 112 74 Flute
085 0 112 73 Piccolo
086 0 112 76 Pan Flute
087 0 112 75 Recorder
088 0 112 80 Ocarina
SYNTH
089 0 112 81 Square Lead
090 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead
091 0 115 82 Analogon
092 0 119 82 Fargo
093 0 112 99 Star Dust
094 0 112 86 Voice Lead
095 0 112 101 Brightness
096 0 112 92 Xenon Pad
097 0 112 95 Equinox
098 0 112 89 Fantasia
099 0 113 90 Dark Moon
100 0 113 101 Bell Pad
PERCUSSION
101 0 112 12 Vibraphone
102 0 112 13 Marimba
103 0 112 14 Xylophone
104 0 112 115 Steel Drums
105 0 112 9 Celesta
106 0 112 11 Music Box
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells
108 0 112 48 Timpani
DRUM KITS
109 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1
110 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2
111 127 0 9 Room Kit
112 127 0 17 Rock Kit
113 127 0 25 Electronic Kit
114 127 0 26 Analog Kit
115 127 0 113 Dance Kit
116 127 0 33 Jazz Kit
117 127 0 41 Brush Kit
118 127 0 49 Symphony Kit
119 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1
120 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2
121 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
72 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
122 0 0 1 Grand Piano
123 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP
124 0 40 1 Piano Strings
125 0 41 1 Dream
126 0 0 2 Bright Piano
127 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP
128 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano
129 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP
130 0 32 3 Detuned CP80
131 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano
132 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
133 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1
134 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP
135 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1
136 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2
137 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP
*138 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2
139 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano
140 0 0 7 Harpsichord
141 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP
142 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2
143 0 0 8 Clavi
144 0 1 8 Clavi KSP
CHROMATIC
145 0 0 9 Celesta
146 0 0 10 Glockenspiel
147 0 0 11 Music Box
148 0 64 11 Orgel
149 0 0 12 Vibraphone
150 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP
151 0 0 13 Marimba
152 0 1 13 Marimba KSP
153 0 64 13 Sine Marimba
154 0 97 13 Balimba
155 0 98 13 Log Drums
156 0 0 14 Xylophone
157 0 0 15 Tubular Bells
158 0 96 15 Church Bells
159 0 97 15 Carillon
160 0 0 16 Dulcimer
161 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2
162 0 96 16 Cimbalom
163 0 97 16 Santur
ORGAN
164 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ
165 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ
166 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1
167 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2
168 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1
169 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3
170 0 40 17 16+2'2/3
171 0 64 17 Organ Bass
172 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2
173 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ
174 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2
175 0 0 18 Percussive Organ
176 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ
177 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ
178 0 33 18 Light Organ
179 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2
180 0 0 19 Rock Organ
181 0 64 19 Rotary Organ
182 0 65 19 Slow Rotary
183 0 66 19 Fast Rotary
184 0 0 20 Church Organ
185 0 32 20 Church Organ 3
186 0 35 20 Church Organ 2
187 0 40 20 Notre Dame
188 0 64 20 Organ Flute
189 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute
190 0 0 21 Reed Organ
191 0 40 21 Puff Organ
192 0 0 22 Accordion
193 0 0 23 Harmonica
194 0 32 23 Harmonica 2
195 0 0 24 Tango Accordion
196 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2
GUITAR
197 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar
198 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
199 0 96 25 Ukulele
200 0 0 26 Steel Guitar
201 0 35 26 12-string Guitar
202 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar
203 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
204 0 96 26 Mandolin
205 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar
206 0 32 27 Jazz Amp
207 0 0 28 Clean Guitar
208 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar
209 0 0 29 Muted Guitar
210 0 40 29 Funk Guitar
211 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar
212 0 45 29 Jazz Man
213 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar
214 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 73
215 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar
216 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar
217 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2
218 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics
219 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback
220 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2
BASS
221 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass
222 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm
223 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
224 0 0 34 Finger Bass
225 0 18 34 Finger Dark
226 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
227 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass
228 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2
229 0 65 34 Modulated Bass
230 0 0 35 Pick Bass
231 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass
232 0 0 36 Fretless Bass
233 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2
234 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3
235 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4
236 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1
237 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass
238 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2
239 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap
240 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1
241 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass
242 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2
243 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass
244 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass
245 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass
246 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark
*247 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass
248 0 41 40 DX Bass
STRINGS
249 0 0 41 Violin
250 0 8 41 Slow Violin
251 0 0 42 Viola
252 0 0 43 Cello
253 0 0 44 Contrabass
254 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings
255 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings
256 0 40 45 Suspense Strings
257 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings
258 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp
259 0 40 47 Yang Chin
260 0 0 48 Timpani
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
ENSEMBLE
261 0 0 49 Strings 1
262 0 3 49 Stereo Strings
263 0 8 49 Slow Strings
264 0 35 49 60’s Strings
265 0 40 49 Orchestra
266 0 41 49 Orchestra 2
267 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra
268 0 45 49 Velocity Strings
269 0 0 50 Strings 2
270 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings
271 0 8 50 Legato Strings
272 0 40 50 Warm Strings
273 0 41 50 Kingdom
274 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1
275 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2
276 0 0 53 Choir Aahs
277 0 3 53 Stereo Choir
278 0 32 53 Mellow Choir
279 0 40 53 Choir Strings
280 0 0 54 Voice Oohs
281 0 0 55 Synth Voice
282 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2
283 0 41 55 Choral
284 0 64 55 Analog Voice
285 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit
286 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2
287 0 64 56 Impact
BRASS
288 0 0 57 Trumpet
289 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet
290 0 0 58 Trombone
291 0 18 58 Trombone 2
292 0 0 59 Tuba
293 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet
294 0 0 61 French Horn
295 0 6 61 French Horn Solo
296 0 32 61 French Horn 2
297 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra
298 0 0 62 Brass Section
299 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section
300 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1
301 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass
302 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2
303 0 18 64 Soft Brass
304 0 41 64 Choir Brass
REED
305 0 0 65 Soprano Sax
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
74 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
306 0 0 66 Alto Sax
307 0 40 66 Sax Section
308 0 0 67 Tenor Sax
309 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
310 0 0 68 Baritone Sax
311 0 0 69 Oboe
312 0 0 70 English Horn
313 0 0 71 Bassoon
314 0 0 72 Clarinet
PIPE
315 0 0 73 Piccolo
316 0 0 74 Flute
317 0 0 75 Recorder
318 0 0 76 Pan Flute
319 0 0 77 Blown Bottle
320 0 0 78 Shakuhachi
321 0 0 79 Whistle
322 0 0 80 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
323 0 0 81 Square Lead
324 0 6 81 Square Lead 2
325 0 8 81 LM Square
326 0 18 81 Hollow
327 0 19 81 Shroud
328 0 64 81 Mellow
329 0 65 81 Solo Sine
330 0 66 81 Sine Lead
331 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead
332 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2
333 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth
334 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth
335 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth
336 0 20 82 Big Lead
337 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog
338 0 0 83 Calliope Lead
339 0 65 83 Pure Lead
340 0 0 84 Chiff Lead
341 0 0 85 Charang Lead
342 0 64 85 Distorted Lead
343 0 0 86 Voice Lead
344 0 0 87 Fifths Lead
345 0 35 87 Big Five
346 0 0 88 Bass & Lead
347 0 16 88 Big & Low
348 0 64 88 Fat & Perky
349 0 65 88 Soft Whirl
SYNTH PAD
350 0 0 89 New Age Pad
351 0 64 89 Fantasy
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
352 0 0 90 Warm Pad
353 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad
354 0 0 92 Choir Pad
355 0 66 92 Itopia
356 0 0 93 Bowed Pad
357 0 0 94 Metallic Pad
358 0 0 95 Halo Pad
359 0 0 96 Sweep Pad
SYNTH EFFECTS
360 0 0 97 Rain
361 0 65 97 African Wind
362 0 66 97 Carib
363 0 0 98 Sound Track
364 0 27 98 Prologue
365 0 0 99 Crystal
366 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp
367 0 14 99 Popcorn
368 0 18 99 Tiny Bells
369 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel
370 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes
371 0 41 99 Clear Bells
372 0 42 99 Chorus Bells
373 0 65 99 Soft Crystal
374 0 70 99 Air Bells
375 0 71 99 Bell Harp
376 0 72 99 Gamelimba
377 0 0 100 Atmosphere
378 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere
379 0 19 100 Hollow Release
380 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano
381 0 64 100 Nylon Harp
382 0 65 100 Harp Vox
383 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad
384 0 0 101 Brightness
385 0 0 102 Goblins
386 0 64 102 Goblins Synth
387 0 65 102 Creeper
388 0 67 102 Ritual
389 0 68 102 To Heaven
390 0 70 102 Night
391 0 71 102 Glisten
392 0 96 102 Bell Choir
393 0 0 103 Echoes
394 0 0 104 Sci-Fi
WORLD
395 0 0 105 Sitar
396 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar
397 0 35 105 Sitar 2
398 0 97 105 Tamboura
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 75
The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.
399 0 0 106 Banjo
400 0 28 106 Muted Banjo
401 0 96 106 Rabab
402 0 97 106 Gopichant
403 0 98 106 Oud
404 0 0 107 Shamisen
405 0 0 108 Koto
406 0 96 108 Taisho-kin
407 0 97 108 Kanoon
408 0 0 109 Kalimba
409 0 0 110 Bagpipe
410 0 0 111 Fiddle
411 0 0 112 Shanai
PERCUSSIVE
412 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell
413 0 96 113 Bonang
414 0 97 113 Altair
415 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs
416 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
417 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal
418 0 0 114 Agogo
419 0 0 115 Steel Drums
420 0 97 115 Glass Percussion
421 0 98 115 Thai Bells
422 0 0 116 Woodblock
423 0 96 116 Castanets
424 0 0 117 Taiko Drum
425 0 96 117 Gran Cassa
426 0 0 118 Melodic Tom
427 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2
428 0 65 118 Real Tom
429 0 66 118 Rock Tom
430 0 0 119 Synth Drum
431 0 64 119 Analog Tom
432 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion
433 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal
SOUND EFFECTS
434 0 0 121 Fret Noise
435 0 0 122 Breath Noise
436 0 0 123 Seashore
437 0 0 124 Bird Tweet
438 0 0 125 Telephone Ring
439 0 0 126 Helicopter
440 0 0 127 Applause
441 0 0 128 Gunshot
442 64 0 1 Cutting Noise
443 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2
444 64 0 4 String Slap
445 64 0 17 Flute Key Click
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
446 64 0 33 Shower
447 64 0 34 Thunder
448 64 0 35 Wind
449 64 0 36 Stream
450 64 0 37 Bubble
451 64 0 38 Feed
452 64 0 49 Dog
453 64 0 50 Horse
454 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2
455 64 0 56 Maou
456 64 0 65 Phone Call
457 64 0 66 Door Squeak
458 64 0 67 Door Slam
459 64 0 68 Scratch Cut
460 64 0 69 Scratch Split
461 64 0 70 Wind Chime
462 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2
463 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition
464 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal
465 64 0 83 Car Passing
466 64 0 84 Car Crash
467 64 0 85 Siren
468 64 0 86 Train
469 64 0 87 Jet Plane
470 64 0 88 Starship
471 64 0 89 Burst
472 64 0 90 Roller Coaster
473 64 0 91 Submarine
474 64 0 97 Laugh
475 64 0 98 Scream
476 64 0 99 Punch
477 64 0 100 Heartbeat
478 64 0 101 Footsteps
479 64 0 113 Machine Gun
480 64 0 114 Laser Gun
481 64 0 115 Explosion
482 64 0 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
76 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kit List
•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
Each percussion voice uses one note.
The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For
example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note#
24/Note C0).
•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They
are designed to be played alternately with each other.)
Voice No.
109 110 111 112 113
MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128)
127/0/1 127/0/2 127/0/9 127/0/17 127/0/25
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
Group
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Snare L
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2 BD Rock BD Gate
49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 77
Voice No.
109 114 115 116 117
MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128)
127/0/1 127/0/26 127/0/28 127/0/33 127/0/41
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
Group
Standard Kit 1 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft SD Rock H AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H AnBD Dance-1
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot AnSD OpenRim
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard BD Analog L AnBD Dance-2
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum BD Analog H AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz
49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Analog Snare 1 AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Analog Snare 2 AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 Analog HH Closed 3
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2 Analog HH Closed 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open Analog HH Open 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H Analog Conga H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M Analog Conga M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L Analog Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Maracas
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves Analog Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
78 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Voice No.
109 118 119 120 121
MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128)
127/0/1 127/0/49 126/0/1 126/0/2 126/0/113
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
Group
Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1
SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
Drum Loop
37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum L
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat
49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Marching Sn M Door Slam Door Squeak
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Marching Sn H Scratch Applause
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Jazz Tom 1 Wind Chime Camera
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring 2 Horn
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Jazz Tom 2 Hiccup
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Cuckoo Clock
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Jazz Tom 3 Stream
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Frog
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Jazz Tom 4 Rooster
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Jazz Tom 5 Dog
61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cym. L Cat
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Jazz Tom 6 Owl
63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cym.Short L Horse Gallop
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal Cow
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing Lion
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash Scratch
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Siren Yo!
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cym. H Train Go!
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap Jet Plane Get up!
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Short H Starship Whoow!
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
Burst
Huuaah!
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
Roller Coaster
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Submarine
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas
Wind Punch
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
Stream Heartbeat
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps
Uh!+Hit
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun
97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun
98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion
99 D# 687D# 5 Firework
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 79
Style List
Style
No.
Style Name
8 Beat
001 8BeatModern
002 60’sGtrPop
003 8BeatAdria
004 60’s8Beat
005 8Beat
006 OffBeat
007 60’sRock
008 HardRock
009 RockShuffle
010 8BeatRock
16 Beat
011 16Beat
012 PopShuffle
013 GuitarPop
014 16BtUptempo
015 KoolShuffle
016 HipHopLight
Ballad
017 PianoBallad
018 LoveSong
019 6/8ModernEP
020 6/8SlowRock
021 OrganBallad
022 PopBallad
023 16BeatBallad
Dance
024 EuroTrance
025 Ibiza
026 SwingHouse
027 Clubdance
028 ClubLatin
029 Garage1
030 Garage2
031 TechnoParty
032 UKPop
033 HipHopGroove
034 HipShuffle
035 HipHopPop
Disco
036 70’sDisco
037 LatinDisco
038 SaturdayNight
039 DiscoHands
Swing & Jazz
040 BigBandFast
041 BigBandBallad
042 JazzClub
043 Swing1
044 Swing2
045 Five/Four
046 Dixieland
047 Ragtime
R & B
048 Soul
049 DetroitPop
050 6/8Soul
051 CrocoTwist
052 Rock&Roll
053 ComboBoogie
054 6/8Blues
Country
055 CountryPop
056 CountrySwing
057 Country2/4
058 Bluegrass
Latin
059 BrazilianSamba
060 BossaNova
061 Tijuana
062 DiscoLatin
063 Mambo
064 Salsa
065 Beguine
066 Reggae
Ballroom
067 VienneseWaltz
068 EnglishWaltz
069 Slowfox
070 Foxtrot
071 Quickstep
072 Tango
073 Pasodoble
074 Samba
075 ChaChaCha
076 Rumba
077 Jive
Style
No.
Style Name
Traditional
078 USMarch
079 6/8March
080 GermanMarch
081 PolkaPop
082 OberPolka
083 Tarantella
084 Showtune
085 ChristmasSwing
086 ChristmasWaltz
087 ScottishReel
Waltz
088 SwingWaltz
089 JazzWaltz
090 CountryWaltz
091 OberWalzer
092 Musette
Children
093 Learning2/4
094 Learning4/4
095 Learning6/8
096 Fun 3/4
097 Fun 4/4
Pianist
098 Stride
099 PianoSwing
100 PianoBoogie
101 Arpeggio
102 Habanera
103 SlowRock
104 8BeatPianoBallad
105 6/8PianoMarch
106 PianoWaltz
Style
No.
Style Name
80 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Music Database List
MDB
No.
MDB Name
POP
1 AlvFever
2 DayPdise
3 GoMyWay
4 HowDeep!
5 HurryLuv
6 Imagine
7 JustCall
8 SultanSw
9 WhitePle
10 YesterPf
ROCK
11 JumpRock
12 PickUpPc
13 RdRiverR
14 SatsfyGt
15 Sheriff
16 SmokeWtr
17 TwistAgn
18 VenusPop
DANCE
19 2 of Us
20 B Leave
21 Back St
22 Crockett
23 FunkyTwn
24 KillSoft
25 Nine PM
26 SingBack
27 StrandD
BALLAD
28 AdelineB
29 CatMemry
30 ElvGhett
31 Feeling
32 Mn Rivr
33 OnMyMnd
34 OverRbow
35 ReleseMe
36 SavingLv
37 SmokyEye
38 WhisprSx
R & B
39 AmazingG
40 BoogiePf
41 Clock Rk
42 CU later
43 HappyDay
44 RisingSn
45 ShookUp
46 TeddyBer
SWING & JAZZ
47 ChooChoo
48 HighMoon
49 InMood
50 MistySax
51 MoonLit
52 New York
53 SaintMch
54 ShearJz
55 TstHoney
56 USPatrol
EASY LISTENING
57 Close2U
58 Entrtain
59 LuvStory
60 MyPrince
61 PupetStr
62 Raindrop
63 R'ticGtr
64 SingRain
65 SmallWld
66 SpkSoft
67 StrangeN
68 TimeGoes
69 WhteXmas
70 WishStar
71 WondrWld
LATIN
72 BambaLa
73 BeHappy!
74 CopaLola
75 DayNight
76 Ipanema
MDB
No.
MDB Name
77 MuchoTrp
78 Sunshine
79 Tico Org
80 TrbWave
COUNTRY
81 BoxerFlt
82 CntryRds
83 Jambala
84 TopWorld
85 YlwRose
BALLROOM
86 BrazilBr
87 CherryTp
88 DanubeWv
89 TangoAc
90 Tea4Two
TRADITIONAL
91 CampRace
92 CielPari
93 GrndClok
94 JinglBel
95 MickMrch
96 Showbiz
97 StarMrch
98 WashPost
99 XmasWalz
100 YankDood
MDB
No.
MDB Name
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 81
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Harmony Type Description
01 Duet
If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the
Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompa-
niment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you
play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever
keys are played.
02 Trio
03 Block
04 Country
05 Octave
06 Trill 1/4 note
If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) con-
tinuously.
07 Trill 1/6 note
08 Trill 1/8 note
09 Trill 1/12 note
10 Trill 1/16 note
11 Trill 1/24 note
12 Trill 1/32 note
13 Tremolo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.
(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)
14 Tremolo 1/6 note
15 Tremolo 1/8 note
16 Tremolo 1/12 note
17 Tremolo 1/16 note
18 Tremolo 1/24 note
19 Tremolo 1/32 note
20 Echo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.
(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)
21 Echo 1/6 note
22 Echo 1/8 note
23 Echo 1/12 note
24 Echo 1/16 note
25 Echo 1/24 note
26 Echo 1/32 note
No. Reverb Type Description
01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.
04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.
06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
10 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
1–2 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
3–4 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.
5 Off No effect.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
82 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA [ Portable Keyboard ] Date:21-Aug-2006
Model PSR-E313/YPT-310 MIDI Implementation Chart Version:1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Function...
Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16
Channel Changed x x
Default 3 3
Mode Messages x x
Altered ************** x
Note 0 - 127 0 - 127
Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127
Note OFF x x
After Key's x x
Touch Ch's x x
Pitch Bend x o
0,32 o o Bank Select
1x *1 o Modulation wheel
6x *1 o Data Entry(MSB)
38 x *1 x Data Entry(LSB)
7,10 o o
Control 11 x *1 o Expression
64 o o Sustain
Change 71,73,74 x *1 o
MIDI Implementation Chart
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 83
Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127
Change : True # **************
System Exclusive o o
: Song Pos. x x
Common : Song Sel. x x
: Tune x x
System : Clock o o
Real Time: Commands o o
:All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)
Aux :Reset All Cntrls x o(121)
:Local ON/OFF x o(122)
Mes- :All Notes OFF x o(123-125)
sages:Active Sense o o
:Reset x x
72 o o Release Time
84 x *1 o Portamento Cntrl
91,93 o o Effect 1,3 Depth
96,97 x o RPN Inc,Dec
100,101 x o RPN LSB,MSB
*1 Refer to #2 on page 84.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No
84 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
NOTE:
1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily
functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator,
and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or
panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed
below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment,
and songs.
MIDI Master Tuning
System exclusive messages for changing the
Reverb Type and Chorus Type.
2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be
transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they
may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment,
song or using the Harmony effect.
3 Exclusive
<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H
This message automatically restores all default set-
tings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI
Master Tuning.
<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll,
mm, F7H
This message allows the volume of all channels to
be changed simultaneously (Universal System
Exclusive).
The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume.
(Values for “ll” are ignored.)
<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H,
00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H
This message simultaneously changes the tuning
value of all channels.
The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master
Tuning.
The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H,
respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.
<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H,
mmH, llH, F7H
mm : Reverb Type MSB
ll : Reverb Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details.
<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H,
mmH, llH, F7H
mm : Chorus Type MSB
ll : Chorus Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details.
4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message
is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an
FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to
External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH
(accompaniment stop) are recognized.
5 Local ON/OFF
<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F
<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00
Value for “n” is ignored.
Effect map • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
* When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to
no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type
(coming the closest to the specified value) is automati-
cally set.
* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type
names correspond to the number indicated in the dis-
play.
REVERB
CHORUS
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
01 2 8 1617 18 19 20
0 No Effect
1 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3
2 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2
3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2
4 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2
5...127 No Effect
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
01 2 8 1617 18 19 20
0...63 No Effect
64 Thru
65 Chorus (2)Chorus2
66 Celeste (1)Chorus1
67 Flanger (3)Flanger1 (4)Flanger2
68...127 No Effect
MIDI Data Format
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 85
Specifications
Keyboards
61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response
Display
LCD display (backlit)
Setup
•STANDBY/ON
MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX
Panel Controls
[L]/[REC TRACK 2], [R]/[REC TRACK 1], [LISTEN & LEARN],
[TIMING], [WAITING], [A-B REPEAT]/[ACMP ON/OFF],
[REW]/[INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [FF]/[[MAIN/AUTO FILL],
[TEMPO/TAP], [REC], [PAUSE]/[SYNC START], [START/STOP],
[SONG], [STYLE], [VOICE], [FUNCTION], [PORTABLE
GRAND], [MUSIC DATABASE], [REVERB ON/OFF], [DEMO],
[METRONOME ON/OFF], [SPLIT ON/OFF], [DUAL ON/OFF],
[HARMONY ON/OFF], [TOUCH ON/OFF],
number buttons [0]–[9], [+/ YES], [-/ NO]
Voice
108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 1 sound effect kit +
359 XGlite voices + 2 XGlite optional voices
•Polyphony: 32
•DUAL
SPLIT
Style
106 preset Styles + flash memory
Style Control:
ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP,
INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL
Fingering: Multi fingering
Style Volume
Style Register
Education Feature
Chord Dictionary
Lesson 1–3
Function
Style Volume, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Split Point,
Touch Sensitivity, Style Register, Main voice (Volume, Octave,
Chorus Send Level), Dual voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus
Send Level), Split voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send
Level), Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain,
Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, PC mode (PC1/PC2/Off),
Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Setup Send, Time Signature
(Numerator, Denominator), Metronome Volume, Lesson Track
(R), Lesson Track (L),
Demo Cancel
Effects
•Reverb: 9 types
Chorus: 4 types
Harmony: 26 types
Song
102 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory
Song Clear
Song Volume
Music Database
100
Recording
Song
User Song: 5 Songs
Recording Tracks: 1, 2
MIDI
Local On/Off
Initial Setup Send
External Clock
PC mode
Auxiliary jacks
PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN
Amplifier
2.5W + 2.5W
Speakers
12cm x 2
Power Consumption
10W (When using PA-130 power adaptor)
Power Supply
Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent
Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries
Dimensions (W x D x H)
945 x 370 x 128 mm
(37-1/4" x 14-5/8" x 5-1/16")
Weight
4.9kg (10 lbs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries)
Supplied Accessories
Music Rest
Owner’s Manual
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for
information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to
change or modify products or specifications at any time without
prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not
be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha
dealer.
Optional Accessories
•AC Power Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent
USB-MIDI Interface: UX16
•Footswitch: FC4/FC5
•Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L
Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30
86 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Index
A-B REPEAT button ................................................. 41
ACMP ON/OFF button .............................................. 21
DEMO button ............................................................. 19
DUAL ON/OFF button .............................................. 13
FF button .................................................................... 19
FUNCTION button .............................................. 33, 59
HARMONY ON/OFF button .................................... 42
INTRO/ENDING/rit. Button ..................................... 51
L button ...................................................................... 36
LISTEN & LEARN button ........................................ 36
MAIN/AUTO FILL button ........................................ 51
MASTER VOLUME control ................................. 9, 32
METRONOME ON/OFF button ............................... 24
number buttons 0–9, +/YES, -/NO ............................ 33
PAUSE button ............................................................ 19
PORTABLE GRAND button .................................... 15
R button ...................................................................... 36
REC button ................................................................. 27
REC TRACK 1 button ............................................... 29
REC TRACK 2 button ............................................... 29
REVERB ON/OFF button ......................................... 43
REW button ............................................................... 19
SONG button ....................................................... 18, 33
SPLIT ON/OFF button .............................................. 14
STANDBY/ON switch .......................................... 9, 32
START/STOP button ................................................. 32
STYLE button ...................................................... 20, 33
SYNC START button ................................................ 21
TEMPO/TAP button .................................................. 48
TIMING button .......................................................... 37
TOUCH ON/OFF button ........................................... 45
VOICE button ...................................................... 12, 33
WAITING button ....................................................... 38
DC IN 12V jack ........................................................... 8
MIDI IN/OUT terminal .............................................. 61
PHONES/OUTPUT jack .............................................. 9
SUSTAIN jack ............................................................. 9
A
AB Repeat .................................................................. 41
AC Power Adaptor ....................................................... 8
ACMP ON/OFF ......................................................... 21
Auto Accompaniment ................................................ 21
Auto accompaniment range .................................. 21–22
B
Backup ........................................................................ 31
Backup Clear .............................................................. 31
Backup File ................................................................ 31
Battery .......................................................................... 8
Beat Display ............................................................... 34
C
Cancel ......................................................................... 30
Chord ........................................................ 22, 55–56, 58
Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 57
Chord Display ...................................................... 34, 56
Chorus ........................................................................ 44
Chorus Send Level (Dual) .......................................... 60
Chorus Send Level (Main) ......................................... 59
Chorus Send Level (Split) .......................................... 60
Chorus Type List ........................................................ 81
Computer .............................................................. 62–68
D
Delete (Song) ............................................................. 30
Demo .......................................................................... 19
Display ....................................................................... 34
Drum Kit .................................................................... 15
Drum Kit List ............................................................. 76
Dual ............................................................................ 13
E
Ending .................................................................. 50, 52
External Clock ...................................................... 60, 63
F
FF ............................................................................... 19
Flash Clear ................................................................. 31
Flash Memory ............................................................ 67
Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................. 9
Function Setting List ............................................ 59–60
G
Grade .......................................................................... 37
H
Harmony ............................................................... 42–43
Harmony Type List .................................................... 81
Harmony Volume ....................................................... 60
Panel Controls and Terminals Alphabetical Order
Index
PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 87
I
Initial Send ................................................................. 60
Initialization ............................................................... 31
Intro ...................................................................... 49, 52
K
Keyboard Display ...................................................... 34
L
Lesson .................................................................. 35–38
Lesson track R/L for transferred songs ................ 60, 68
Local .................................................................... 60, 62
M
Main/Auto fill ...................................................... 51–52
Master Volume Control ......................................... 9, 32
Measure ...................................................................... 34
Melody Voice ............................................................. 39
Metronome ........................................................... 24–26
Metronome Volume ................................................... 26
MIDI .......................................................................... 61
Music Database .......................................................... 23
Music Rest ................................................................... 6
Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 65
Mute ........................................................................... 40
N
NO .............................................................................. 30
Notation ...................................................................... 34
O
Octave (Dual) ............................................................. 60
Octave (Main) ............................................................ 59
Octave (Split) ............................................................. 60
One Touch Setting ..................................................... 47
Option ........................................................................ 85
P
Panel Sustain .............................................................. 44
Part ............................................................................. 36
Pause .......................................................................... 19
PC setting ................................................................... 63
Press and Hold for a while ......................................... 32
R
Recording ............................................................. 27–29
Remote Control .......................................................... 64
Reverb ........................................................................ 43
Reverb Level .............................................................. 60
Reverb Type List ........................................................ 81
Rew ............................................................................ 19
Rhythm ....................................................................... 20
Root ...................................................................... 55, 57
S
Save data to computer ................................................ 68
SMF Format 0 ............................................................ 65
Song ............................................................................ 18
Song List .................................................................... 19
Song Volume .............................................................. 39
Split ............................................................................ 14
Split Point ............................................................. 14, 46
Start ............................................................................ 32
Stop ............................................................................ 32
Style .......................................................... 20–21, 49–52
Style File .............................................................. 54, 67
Style List .................................................................... 79
Style Volume .............................................................. 53
Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 85
Synchro Start ........................................................ 21, 49
T
Tempo ........................................................................ 48
Time Signature ........................................................... 25
Touch Response ......................................................... 45
Touch sensitivity ........................................................ 45
Track .............................................................. 28, 34, 40
Track Rec ............................................................. 28–29
Transfer ................................................................ 62, 68
Transpose ................................................................... 46
Tuning ........................................................................ 47
Turn Auto accompaniment on or off .......................... 21
U
User Song ............................................................. 27–28
V
Voice .................................................................... 12–14
Voice List ................................................................... 70
X
XGlite ........................................................................... 6
Y
YES ............................................................................ 30
88 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual
Limited Warranty
90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS
Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed
below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models
included in the following series of products:
PSR, YPT SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in
material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to
the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the
consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as
warranty replacements.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY
EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these
limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for
assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation
of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under
warranty.
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a
tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and
to follow all safety precautions.
EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to
failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an
authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and
Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.
Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________
Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________
(Retailer)
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Electronic Service Division
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
[PK] 38
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2007 Yamaha Corporation
WH70550 XXXPOTYX.X-01A0
Printed in China
Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only)
http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Warning: Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Serial No. Purchase Date Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-BP (bottom) 2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injur y or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injur y to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Keep batteries away from children. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. (4)-11 4 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. 1/2 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • Some data items (page 31) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. ● Trademarks • Windows is the registered trademarks of Microsoft ® Corporation. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (4)-11 2/2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 5 Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-E313/YPT-310 PORTATONE! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Formats and functions GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Yamaha Education Suite 5 The instrument features the new Yamaha Education Suite—a set of learning tools that utilize the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulfilling than ever before! Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. Style File The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. Supplied Accessories The PSR-E313/YPT-310 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Music rest • Owner’s manual (this book) 6 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual ● Music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Contents Formats and functions ............................................... 6 Supplied Accessories................................................. 6 Setting Up 8 Power Requirements ................................................. 8 Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) . 9 Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) ................. 9 Using the MIDI Terminals .......................................... 9 Turn on the power...................................................... 9 Panel Controls and Terminals 10 Front Panel .............................................................. 10 Rear Panel ............................................................... 10 — Quick Guide — Step 1 Changing the Voices 12 Try playing a variety of instrument Voices ............... 12 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual ............. 13 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split ............................................... 14 Playing the Grand Piano Voice ................................ 15 Drum kits.................................................................. 15 Step 2 Fun Sounds 17 Step 3 Playing Songs 18 Select and Listen to a Specific Song ....................... 18 Step 4 Play with a Style 20 Selecting a rhythm of a Style ................................... 20 Playing with a Style.................................................. 21 Step 5 Play Using the Music Database 23 Step 6 Play With The Metronome Song settings 39 Changing the Melody Voice .................................... 39 Song Volume ........................................................... 39 Mute ........................................................................ 40 Practice Makes Perfect ........................................... 41 Play With a Variety of Effects 42 Adding Harmony...................................................... 42 Adding Reverb......................................................... 43 Adding Chorus......................................................... 44 Adding Panel Sustain .............................................. 44 Handy Performance Features 45 Touch Response Sensitivity .................................... 45 Setting the Split Point .............................................. 46 Transpose ............................................................... 46 Tuning ..................................................................... 47 One Touch Setting .................................................. 47 Changing the tempo of the Song/Style.................... 48 Adjusting the Voice Parameters .............................. 48 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 49 Various ways to start and stop Style playback ........ 49 Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................... 51 Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................... 53 Registering Style Files............................................. 54 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords 55 Easy Chords ............................................................ 55 Standard Chords ..................................................... 55 Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ...... 57 Function Settings 59 Select the item and change the value ..................... 59 About MIDI 61 What is MIDI? .......................................................... 61 What You Can Do With MIDI................................... 61 Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument..................................... 62 Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer............. 65 24 Start the metronome ................................................ 24 Step 7 Record your own performance 27 Recording Your Performance .................................. 27 Recording to a specified track.................................. 28 Deleting User Songs ................................................ 30 Backup and Initialization 31 Backup ..................................................................... 31 Initialization .............................................................. 31 Basic Operation and Displays 32 Troubleshooting ...........................................................69 Voice List.......................................................................70 Maximum Polyphony ............................................... 70 Drum Kit List .................................................................76 Style List .......................................................................79 Music Database List .....................................................80 Effect Type List .............................................................81 MIDI Implementation Chart ..........................................82 MIDI Data Format ..........................................................84 Effect map ............................................................... 84 Specifications ...............................................................85 Index ..............................................................................86 Basic Operation ....................................................... 32 Display ..................................................................... 34 Song Lesson 35 Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn)........................................ 35 Lesson 2 (Timing) .................................................... 37 Lesson 3 (Waiting) ................................................... 38 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 7 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor q Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (the backlit display is off). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. w Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply jack. e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. w e AC power adaptor AC outlet ■ Using Batteries q Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. w Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the side of the compartment. e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. CAUTION • Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting in loss of the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination during transferring or recording a data. 8 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 31), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. CAUTION • Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low, possibly resulting in loss of data in the flash memory. • Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orientation, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. Setting Up Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on. Using the MIDI Terminals Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) The PSR-E313/YPT-310 speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING MIDI instrument The instrument also features MIDI terminals, allowing you to interface the instrument with other MIDI instruments or computers. (For more information, see page 61.) NOTE • MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc. • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. Turn on the power CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting and turn power off the devices before connecting them. Failure to observe these precautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Pressing the switch again turns the power off. Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) Backup data in the flash memory (page 31) is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals ■ Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch ....................................page 9, 32 w [MASTER VOLUME] control ......................... pages 9, 32 When the lesson mode e LESSON PART [L] button .............................................................page 36 [R] button.............................................................page 36 When the recording mode e [REC TRACK 2] button........................................page 29 [REC TRACK 1] button........................................page 29 r [LISTEN & LEARN] button..................................page 36 t [TIMING] button...................................................page 37 y [WAITING] button ................................................page 38 u [FUNCTION] button..................................... pages 59, 33 i [SONG] button............................................. pages 18, 33 o [STYLE] button............................................ pages 20, 33 !0 [VOICE] button ............................................ pages 12, 33 !1 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO] ............page 33 !2 [DEMO] button.....................................................page 19 !3 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .........................page 24 When the Song mode !4 [A-B REPEAT] button..........................................page 41 !5 [REW] button .......................................................page 19 !6 [FF] button ...........................................................page 19 !9 [PAUSE] button....................................................page 19 When the Style mode !4 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ......................................page 21 !5 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................................page 51 !6 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button...................................page 51 !9 [SYNC START] button.........................................page 21 !7 [TEMPO/TAP] button...........................................page 48 !8 [REC] button........................................................page 27 @0 [START/STOP] button .........................................page 32 @1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button..............................page 15 @2 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................................page 23 @3 [REVERB ON/OFF] button..................................page 43 @4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................................page 14 @5 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................................page 13 @6 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ..............................page 42 @7 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ....................................page 45 @8 Drum Kit...............................................................page 16 ■ Rear Panel @9 MIDI IN/OUT terminals ........................................page 61 #0 SUSTAIN jack.........................................................page 9 #1 PHONES/OUTPUT jack .........................................page 9 #2 DC IN 12V jack.......................................................page 8 10 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual ■ Front Panel Song List (page 19) q e w !4 !5 !6 !7 Style List (page 76) !8 Panel Controls and Terminals Music Database List (page 80) Display (page 34) Voice List (page 70) !2 t 001 GrandPno 001 y !9 !1 u r i o !3 !0 @1 @0 001 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 GrandPno 001 @8 ■ Rear Panel @9 #0 #1 #2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 11 Step — Quick Guide — 1 Changing the Voices Try playing a variety of instrument Voices In addition to the piano Voice, a wide variety of other instrument Voices can be selected and played, including guitar, trumpet and flute. The Voice selected here becomes the Main Voice. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name are displayed. Voice number 001 Voice name GrandPno 001 2 Select a Voice. Select the desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 70. 084 3 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing different Voices. 12 Appears when the Voice mode. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Flute The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual Quick Guide You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on the previous page. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice. Two Voices sound at the same time Play the Dual Voice Step 1 Changing the Voices Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the Dual function on. When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the Main Voice. To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button again. Appears when Dual is on. 084 Flute 001 Selecting a Dual Voice The best-suited Dual Voice is automatically selected whenever you turn Dual on, but you can select any of the available Dual Voices. 1 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “D. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Dual Voice will appear. Currently selected Dual Voice 102 Marimba NOTE • You can also access the Dual Voice setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times, then selecting Dual Voice. 001 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select a Dual Voice. Select the desired Dual Voice by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 70. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 13 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.” The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice” Split Point Main Voice and Dual Voice Split Voice Play the Split Voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the Split function on. When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split Point. When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT ON/ OFF] button to turn Split off. Appears when Split is on. 059 Choir NOTE 001 • The Split Point setting can be changed as required (page 46). Select a Split Voice You can select a different Split Voice by following the procedure outlined below. 1 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “S. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Split Voice will appear. The currently selected Split Voice 039 FngrBass 001 Hold for longer than a second. 2 14 Select a Split Voice Select the desired Split Voice by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 70. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can also access the Split Voice setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times, then selecting the Split Voice. Playing the Grand Piano Voice Quick Guide When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Step 1 Changing the Voices The Voice “Grand Piano 001” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Drum kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When drum kits (Voice number 109–121) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds directly from the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Select the desired Drum kit. Select one of the Voice numbers from 109–121 by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Example: 109 Standard Kit 1 109 Std.Kit1 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 15 16 us h Br q h C us lic k H S Ta wir l p Sn Sw ir Sn are l Ba are Rol ss H l Ba Dr Sof ss um t So D ru m ft Ba Ha ss rd D ru m Sn Sna ar re e H M Fl H oo ar d r Fl Tom oo rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal la al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e C al 2 ym ba C Bo l 2 on ng ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab Sa W asa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le Ji Op ng en le B Be ells ll T re e Br Se PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual la p ick C at d i-H an im t Sh ap ot Standard Kit 1 116 Jazz Kit 110 Standard Kit 2 117 Brush Kit 111 Room Kit 118 Symphony Kit 112 Rock Kit 119 SFX Kit 1 113 Electronic Kit 120 SFX Kit 2 114 Analog Kit 121 Sound Effect Kit 115 Dance Kit ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te 109 C at i-H H C lo se d P H i-H eda l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo u C ow rine be ll Vi br as la p Bo ng o L C on ga H O pe Ti m n ba le Ag L og o L M ar ac as G ui ro Sh C o la ve rt s H H R St n de pe Si O Sl Ta p ne s ick St h h ta as C us us 3 Br Br ● Drum Kit List Try out each key. You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more—a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 76. ● Example: 109 Standard Kit 1 To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key, look at the icons printed above the keys. C3 Step 2 — Quick Guide — Fun Sounds Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Select the Sound Effect kit. Select Voice number 121 by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 121 3 Step 2 Fun Sounds 1 Quick Guide This instrument also includes a wide range of unique sound effects. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a dog barking, running water, a creaking door and many other unique effects. SE Kit Try out each key. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds. Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll be able to play various sound effects from the keyboard: barking, braying, yelling, and much more. After trying out these sounds, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the instrument Voice to the default setting of Voice “001 Grand Piano.” PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 17 Step — Quick Guide — 3 Playing Songs Select and Listen to a Specific Song This instrument has 102 built-in Songs. Listening to a Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button. The Song number and name are displayed. Song number 001 Song name Appears when the Song mode is active. Cruisin 001 2 3 18 Select the desired Song by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Song List on next page. 001–102 Built in Songs (see next page) 103–107 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 108– Songs transferred from a computer on page 67 Press the [START/STOP] button. The Song will begin playing. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can play Songs recorded from the instrument or transferred from a computer. The procedure for playing these Songs is the same as that of the built-in Songs. Quick Guide ● Other Operations [REW] button ........... Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [FF] button................ Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [PAUSE] button ........ Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume playback from the point at which it was stopped. Step 3 Playing Songs ● Using the [DEMO] button Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001, 002, 003, 004, 025, 041, 064, 084, 081, in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song 001. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button. ● Song List 004* 005* 006* 007* 008* 009* 010* 011* 012* 013* 014* 015* 016* 017* 018* 019* 020* 021* 022* 023* 024* 025* 026* 027* 028* 029* 030* 031 032 033 034 035 ˆ 001 002 003 Song Name TOP PICKS Cruisin Jessica Castaway CLASSICAL MELODIES Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty) (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Air (Orchestral Suite) (J. S. Bach) Minuetto/Boccherini (L. Boccherini) Siciliano/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach) Menuet (L’Arlésienne) (G. Bizet) Slavonic Dances op.72-2 (A. Dvorák) Largo (From the New World) (A. Dvorák) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romanze/Beethoven (L. v. Beethoven) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Méditation (Thaïs) (J. Massenet) Serenade/Haydn (F. J. Haydn) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Danza dell’Ore (La Gioconda) (A. Ponchielli) Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) L’éléphant (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) Wachet auf, ruft uns die Stimme BWV. 645 (J. S. Bach) TRADITIONAL MELODIES Greensleeves (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Amazing Grace (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) ˆ No. No. 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 Song Name Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Muffin Man (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Jingle Bells (J. S. Pierpont) PIANO SOLO Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” (F. Chopin) Menuett/Beethoven (L. v. Beethoven) Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331) (W. A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Melodie (Album für die Jugend) (R. Schumann) Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die Jugend) (R. Schumann) Von fremden Ländern und Menschen (Kinderszenen) (R. Schumann) Träumerei (Kinderszenen) (R. Schumann) Thema (Impromptus D.935-3) (F. Schubert) Menuett BWV. Anh.116 (J. S. Bach) Invention Nr.1 (J. S. Bach) Gavotte/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach) Arietta/Grieg (E. Grieg) To a Wild Rose (E. A. MacDowell) Tango/Albeniz (I. Albéniz) La Fille aux Cheveux de Lin (C. A. Debussy) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) No. 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song Name Pastorale (J. F. Burgmüller) The Last Rose of Summer (Traditional) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) The Entertainer (S. Joplin) PIANO ENSEMBLE Londonderry Air (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Traditional) Three Blind Mice (Traditional) Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Believe Me If All Those Endearing Young Charms (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L’adieu” (F. Chopin) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach/C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. (W. A. Mozart) Der Vogelfänger bin ich ja (W. A. Mozart) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Die Schlittenfahrt K.605-3 (W. A. Mozart) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) O Mio Babbino Caro (G. Puccini) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Frühlingslied (F. Mendelssohn) Ode to Joy (L. v. Beethoven) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Deck the Halls (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) • Songs with an asterisk mark (*) are ones which do not have a left part. Therefore, the lesson is applicable only for the right hand. • Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A Song Book is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/registration/ PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 19 Step — Quick Guide — 4 Play with a Style Selecting a rhythm of a Style The Style feature provides backing and rhythm parts in a wide variety of musical categories, including rock, blues, techno and much more. Here’s how to play a rhythm of a Style. The rhythm sound consists of percussion instruments. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The Style number and name are displayed. Style number 001 Style name 8BtModrn Appears when the Style mode is active. 001 2 Select a Style. Select the desired Style by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Style List on page 76. 016 HH Light You can also select commercially available Style Files. To do this load the Style Files from the computer to the instrument, and then register the style data starting with to style number 107. (Refer to the information on transferring data on page 67 and registering styles on page 54.) You can play Style Files in the same way that you play the internal styles. If the Style File has not been registered, “No Data” will be displayed when selecting style number 107. 3 20 Press the [START/STOP] button. The Style rhythm will start. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (098–106) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. To use these Styles, turn on the auto accompaniment and play the keyboard as described on pages 21–22. (The bass and chord accompaniment parts will sound.) Playing with a Style Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. Turn auto accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button again to turn the auto accompaniment off. 001 Step 4 Play with a Style 1 2 Quick Guide On the previous page, you’ve learned how to select your favorite rhythm of a Style. Here, you’ll learn how to expand on that rhythm with bass and chord backing, and use all of it as your accompaniment as you play. 8BtModrn 001 Appears when auto accompaniment is on ● When auto accompaniment is on ... NOTE The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only chords. This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.” • You can change the Split Point. Refer to “Setting the Split Point” on page 46. Split Point (54; F#2) Auto Accompaniment range 3 Turn SYNC START on. Press the [SYNC START] button. 001 8BtModrn 001 Flashes when Sync Start is on. When the Sync Start standby mode is engaged, Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can turn off Sync Start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 21 4 The Style will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Not sure how to play chords? No problem! This instrument is capable of playing chords even if you only play one key. Try playing one, two or three keys (any notes will do) in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. Different keys will produce different results. Refer to page 55 for detailed instructions for playing chords. Split Point Auto Accompaniment range 5 Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. Split Point Auto Accompaniment range 6 22 You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 5 — Quick Guide — Play Using the Music Database Quick Guide Step You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. 001 Step 5 Play Using the Music Database 1 AlvFever A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 80 of the manual, use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “051 MoonLit”. 051 3 MoonLit Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 46). Refer to page 55 for information about playing chords. Split Point Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 23 Step — Quick Guide — 6 Play With The Metronome Start the metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Starting the metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/ OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. 001 GrandPno 1 1 Displays the current beat. Setting the metronome tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to display the tempo. Tempo value 090 2 24 Tempo Set the metronome tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. The tempo can be adjusted between 11–280. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimeSigN”. Number of beats per measure. 04 TimeSigN Hold for longer than a second. 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. 3 NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times to select the beat length function “TimeSigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. 04 TimeSigD The length of one beat. 4 Use the [+], [-] to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 25 Step 6 Play With The Metronome 1 Quick Guide In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. Setting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “MetroVol” appears. 100 MetroVol Metronome Volume 2 26 Set the metronome volume by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 7 — Quick Guide — Record your own performance Quick Guide Step Recording Your Performance 1 Step 7 Record your own performance You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recording. Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own performance. Press the [REC] button. NOTE Flashes rEC • A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. User 1 001 NOTE • Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once the [REC] button is pressed. The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (Song numbers 103–107) available for recording is displayed. If you want to select the Song you will be recording, select the desired Song number by using the [+] and [-] buttons. After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP indication is on. You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again ( and stop flashing). 2 Start recording. When you play the keyboard, recording will begin. CAUTION Split Point By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded with your performance. When Auto Accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard performance is recorded. • If all User Songs (Song numbers 103–107) contain recorded data, Song 103 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in Song 103, so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 27 3 Stop recording. CAUTION Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.) To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/ STOP] button. ●In order to record with the Style, turn the Auto Accompaniment to on (see Steps 1–2 on page 21), and then record according to the instructions. (The “ACMP ON” lights.) ● In order to record only your performance, turn the Auto Accompaniment to off and record according to the normal steps. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. CAUTION • Keep in mind that any kind of power failure during recording—such as the power being turned off, the AC adaptor being plugged/unplugged or the batteries running down— will result in data loss. NOTE (The “ACMP ON” is unlit.) • Use the Musicsoft Downloader to backup the User Songs to a computer (page 65). Recording to a specified track The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you want to record to. About track recording If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwritten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new recording). User Song Data that can be recorded to Track 2 Style playback* (including chord changes) or your own keyboard performance Data that can be recorded to Track 1 Your own keyboard performance only • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. Recording to the specified track Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a User Song like that depicted below. User Song Style 28 • Record following the steps in the previous page, and your performance will be recorded to Track 1 and the Style (if you are playing one) will be recorded to Track 2. NOTE * When playing the Style Track 2 NOTE User Song Track 1 Track 2 Track 1 Your own keyboard Your own keyboard Your own keyboard performance performance performance PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual • The settings and buttons below cannot be changed, or if changed, the new settings cannot be recorded if entered during the recording process. ACMP ON/OFF, split point, reverb type, chorus type, harmony type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button, [SOUND EFFECT KIT] button. Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off, depending on what you want to record. NOTE If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn ACMP off. 2 • Keep in mind that both Tracks 1 and 2 will be overwritten with new data if you record without specifying the tracks. Specify the track you want to record. Specify the track 2 when you want to record the Style. When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you can specify either track. ● Recording to Track 1 Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 1] button simultaneously. rEC • The both “L” and “R” flashes, this indicates that you have specified Track 1 when the Auto Accompaniment is on. If you want to record your own performance, press the [TRACK 2] button to stop the “L” flashing. If you want to record a Style, press the [REC] button to cancel the recording, and repeat the procedure from the beginning. User 1 001 Flashes when track 1 is selected for recording. Press simultaneously ● Recording to Track 2 Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 2] button simultaneously. rEC Flashes when track 2 is selected for recording. User 1 001 Press simultaneously 3 Lights when recorded data exists. Turns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute is set to on (page 40) to turn off playback of the track. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 3 If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style. 4 NOTE Start recording Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 27–28. By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the keyboard (any key is OK) when the Auto Accompaniment is set to off. • You can record a new track while listening to a previously recorded track (the track indication will appear). You can also mute recorded tracks (the track will disappear) while recording a new track by pressing the desired track button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 29 Step 7 Record your own performance 1 Quick Guide Specifying track recording Deleting User Songs Deleting an entire User Song NOTE • You cannot delete a specific track from a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 103 2 User 1 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. The Song Delete display appears. YEs ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. YEs Sure? You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song. “Writing!” message will appear while the track is being deleted. Writing! 30 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. You can also save the settings as backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. Refer to the section “Transferring a backup file from the PSRE313/YPT-310 to a computer” on page 68. ● Parameters that are saved in backup: • User Songs • Style number 107 • Touch Response on/off setting • The following Function settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Demo Cancel, Panel Sustain Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. Backup Clear To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory (described above), turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. CAUTION • When you execute the Backup Clear operation, backup parameters will be cleared. Flash Clear To clear Song data and Style data that has been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, simultaneously hold down the highest white key and the three highest black keys on the keyboard and turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, Song data and Style data you have purchased and downloaded will also be cleared. Make sure to save your important data by transferring to a computer using Musicsoft Downloader (page 68). PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 31 Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Turning the power on Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Adjusting the volume Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. 001 GrandPno 001 About the [START/STOP] button Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected Song or Style (rhythm). 32 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “Press & Hold” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related or different function. Basic Operation and Displays Press a button to select a basic function Press the [SONG] button to select a Song. Press the [STYLE] button to select a Style. When you select a basic function, the name and number of the currently selected Song, Style and Voice is shown. From this display, you can select the desired Song, Style or Voice. Press the [VOICE] button to select a Voice. Set the number or value ● Number buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song, Style or Voice number or parameter value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano. 002 BritePno Press number buttons [0], [0], [2]. Function Settings (page 59) The [FUNCTION] button contains 34 settings. Each time you press the [FUNCTION] button, the setting item is selected in sequence, and the value of the selected item can be changed in the display. ● [+], [-] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 33 Basic Operation and Displays Display The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status for various functions. Song/recording track display Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. Information related to the Song/recording tracks is shown here. (See pages 27 and 40.) Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Measure Indicates the current measure during playback of a Song. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. 001 Beat Display Indicates the beat of the current Style or Song with flashing arrows. GrandPno 003 Chord Display Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. ACMP ON Appears when the auto accompaniment is on. Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. 34 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual DUAL Appears when the Dual function is on (page 13). HARMONY Appears when the Harmony function is on (page 42). SPLIT Appears when the Split function is on (page 14). REVERB Appears when Reverb is on (page 43). TOUCH RESPONSE Appears when Touch Response is on (page 45). 003 Song Lesson Yamaha Education Suite 5 You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. Songs that can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to flash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 65). The procedure for transferring songs are described on page 67. ■ Lesson Flow Select a Song for your lesson. Select the part you want to practice. Select the practice method. Start the Lesson! ■ The practice methods: Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ........ Listen and learn the melody or rhythm of a selected Song. Lesson 2 (Timing) ...................... Learn to play the notes at the correct timing along with the Song. Lesson 3 (Waiting) ..................... Learn to play the correct notes. Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) There’s no need to play the keyboard in Lesson 1. The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. 1 NOTE • User Songs cannot be used for the lesson. NOTE Select the desired Song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and then select a Song (referring to the Song list on page 19) by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-]. If you want to practice a Song you’ve transferred from a computer, select one of the Songs beginning from Song number 108. 068 • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 1 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. Chevaler 001 The instrument includes 102 built in Songs. Some Songs (as shown below) are intended for use as right-hand lessons, and cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. ● Songs for right-hand lesson Song numbers: 004–030 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 35 Song Lesson 2 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The selected part is displayed. Left-hand lesson Right-hand lesson Left Right Both-hands lesson BothHand A “No LPart” message is shown in the display if you select the left part in one of the Songs 004–030, which do not have left part data. These Songs cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. NOTE • For songs transferred from a computer, the “No LPart” indication does not appear, even when there is no left hand part in the song. No LPart 3 Start Lesson 1. Press the [LISTEN & LEARN] button to start Lesson 1. The melody of the part you selected in Step 2 will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. r1 LISTEN 011 The notation and key positions of the model melody are shown in the display. 4 36 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Even after Lesson 1 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the Voice selected. • You can select Lessons 1–3 by pressing the [LISTEN & LEARN], [TIMING] and [WAITING] buttons, respectively. Song Lesson Lesson 2 (Timing) In this lesson, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long as you play in time with the rhythm. 1 Select a Song for your lesson. • You cannot use Dual or Split Voices during lessons. • The Split Point is fixed and it cannot be changed. For the left-hand lesson, it is fixed at 59 or B2; for the left-hand chord lesson, it is fixed at 54 or F#2. NOTE • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 2 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. 2 Select the part you want to practice. 3 Start Lesson 2. Press the [TIMING] button to start Lesson 2. r2 NOTE NOTE • Even after Lesson 2 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. TIMING 004 Play the notes shown in the display. In Lesson 2, simply play each note in time with the music. 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Grade When the lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode 2 or 3, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. OK Good Very0Good Excellent PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 37 Song Lesson Lesson 3 (Waiting) In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note. 1 Select a Song for your lesson. NOTE 2 Select the part you want to practice. 3 Start Lesson 3. Press the [WAITING] button to start Lesson 3. r3 WAITING Play the notes shown in the display. Try playing the correct notes. 4 38 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 3 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. NOTE • Even after Lesson 3 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. Song settings Changing the Melody Voice You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. 1 Select the Song and play it. Refer to the section “Playing Songs” on page 18. 2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. 004 HnkyTonk 001 The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard. If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 3 Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice selected in Step 2 has replaced the Song’s original melody Voice. Hold for longer than a second. Song Volume This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Song playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound. 1 Press the [SONG] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 39 Song settings 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SongVol” appears. Current Song Volume 100 3 Song Volume SongVol Set the Song Volume by pressing the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (100). Mute You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback. • Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during Song playback. • Track 2 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during Song playback. You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track buttons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by selecting any other Song. 001 Cruisin 010 Pressing one of the Track buttons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] will mute the corresponding track during Song playback. 40 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Lit—track contains data. Unlit—track is muted or contains no data. Song settings Practice Makes Perfect You can repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. This function lets you specify a section of a Song you want to practice—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A B Repeat playback of this section 1 Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). “A-REPEAT” will be displayed. A- 2 REPEAT • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the Song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the Song. REPEAT You can stop repeat playback by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue. oFF • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [AB REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly, letting you practice the section over and over. A-b NOTE NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song or Style mode. REPEAT PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 41 Play With a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn harmony on. When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again to turn Harmony off. Appears when harmony is on. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Harmony Type. Currently selected Harmony type 02 Trio Hold for longer than a second. 3 42 Select a desired Harmony Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section “How to sound each Harmony Type” on the next page as well as the Harmony Type List for details. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is automatically selected. NOTE • You can also access the Harmony Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times. • Harmony will be turned off if the Chord Dictionary function is used. Play With a Variety of Effects NOTE ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 01–05 • Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo) Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 21). Keep holding down the keys. • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). • Harmony type 20–26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06–12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 59). Adding Reverb Reverb adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound that you play on the keyboard. To add Reverb Press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button to turn Reverb on. Reverb is normally on. You can check how the selected Reverb Type sounds by playing the keyboard. To turn Reverb off, press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button again. Appears when Reverb is on. Select a Reverb Type The ideal type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb Types. 1 Press and hold the [REVERB ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “REVERB” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Reverb Type. 02 Hall2 Currently selected Reverb Type Hold for longer than a second. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 43 Play With a Variety of Effects 2 Select the desired Reverb Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81 for details. You can adjust the Reverb depth in the Function Settings (page 59). NOTE • You can also access the Reverb Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times. Adding Chorus This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. The best-suited Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a Voice; however, you can select any of the available types. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Chorus” appears. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Chorus Type. 1 2 Chorus1 Currently selected Chorus Type Select a desired Chorus Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81 for details. You can adjust the Chorus depth independently for the Main, Dual and Split Voices in the Function Settings (page 59). Adding Panel Sustain This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Sustain” item appears. oFF Sustain Current setting 2 Press the [+] button to turn the Panel Sustain on. Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play on the keyboard when the Panel Sustain is on. To turn it off, press the [-] button. on Sustain On 44 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • See the section “Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)” on page 9 for information on applying sustain with the optional footswitch. Handy Performance Features Touch Response Sensitivity Touch Response Appears when Touch Response is on. NOTE • The Touch Response function cannot be used for some Voices (such as organ), even if the Touch Response icon appears in the display. Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn Touch Response on. When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button again to turn the Touch Response off. When Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys. Setting the Touch Sensitivity When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sensitivity of the keyboard in response to keyboard dynamics in three steps. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—in other words, greater sensitivity. 1 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current Touch Sensitivity value. Currently selected Touch Sensitivity 2 Medium Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select a Touch Sensitivity setting between 1 and 3 by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 45 Handy Performance Features Setting the Split Point The Split Point setting can be changed as desired. Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 48 60 72 84 96 The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key. When you change the Split Point, the auto accompaniment range also changes. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SplitPnt” appears. Currently selected Split Point 054 Split Point SplitPnt 001 NOTE 2 Split Point Set the Split Point by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (54 or F#2). Transpose The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Transpos” appears. Current transpose value 00 2 Transpos Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to set the Transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices (Voice numbers 109–121) cannot be changed. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (00). 46 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Tuning You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. The overall tuning of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “Tuning” appears. Currently tuning value 000 2 Tuning Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to set the Tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices (Voice numbers 109–121) cannot be changed. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (000). One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Press the [VOICE] button, and then select Voice number “000” by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Appears when One Touch Setting is on. 000 SprnoSax This turns the One Touch Setting feature on. One Touch Setting will be turned off if you select any other Voice number. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 47 Handy Performance Features Changing the tempo of the Song/Style Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display after selecting a Style/Song. Current Tempo value 116 2 Tempo Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. You can also set the Tempo by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the Tempo during Style/Song playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice. Adjusting the Voice Parameters The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can be shifted by up or down in octaves) and Chorus Send Level can be individually adjusted for the Main, Dual, and Split Voices. ● Main Voice Parameters (page 59) • Main Voice Volume • Main Voice Octave • Main Voice Chorus Send Level ● Dual Voice Parameters (page 60) • Dual Voice Volume • Dual Voice Octave • Dual Voice Chorus Send Level ● Split Voice Parameters (page 60) • Split Voice Volume • Split Voice Octave • Split Voice Chorus Send Level You can adjust each of the parameters above in the Function settings (page 59). 48 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a Style or Song. Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Various ways to start and stop Style playback Starting Style playback The following three methods can be used to start Style playback. In all cases you will need to press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on before actually starting Style playback. Whichever method you choose, you can press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] before starting playback. To begin your performance, an introduction will play automatically, then will automatically switch to the MAIN section when finished. ■ Immediate Start Press the [START/STOP] button to begin rhythm-only playback of the selected Style. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Appears when the auto accompaniment is on Immediate Start ■ Chord Start Press the [SYNC START] button and the beat arrows will begin flashing, indicating that the Sync Start “standby” mode has been engaged. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Accompaniment range 001 GrandPno 001 Sync Start standby Style playback begins when you play a chord ■ Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Style rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Start at the tapped tempo PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 49 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Stopping Style playback The following three methods can be used to stop Style playback. ■ Immediate Stop Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button. Immediate Stop ■ Stop and Enter Sync Start Mode If you press the [SYNC START] button during Style playback, playback will stop immediately and the Sync Start standby mode will be engaged (beat arrows will flash). Stop immediately and enter the Sync Start mode 001 GrandPno 001 Sync Start standby ■ Play the Ending and Stop Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending section. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through. Stop after ending plays If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the ending is playing), the ending will play in ritardando (the tempo will gradually get slower). 50 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Pattern Variation (Sections) The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” (patterns) that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing the section A and B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. Turn auto accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Appears when the auto accompaniment is on. 3 Turn SYNC START on. Press the [SYNC START] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 51 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. MAIN A The name of the selected section—MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords” on page 55. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 52 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Style playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “StyleVol” appears. Current Style volume setting 100 3 Style Volume StyleVol Set the Style volume by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (100). PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 53 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Registering Style Files This instrument features 106 internal styles, but other styles, such as those which can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be registered into style number 107 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file register function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 65 (“Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer”). The procedure described below registers a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 107. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button as many time as necessary to select the style file load function “StyleReg”. StyleReg After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 2 Execute the register operation. With the name of the style file you want to register shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 3 A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. 54 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords You’ve learned in the section “Play with a Style (Accompaniment)” on page 20 that the “feel” of the Style changes every time you play a chord on the left-hand side of the keyboard. Here, you’ll learn the types of the chords and how to play them in greater detail. The examples of chords are given here in the key of C. There are two basic ways (below) you can play the chords on the left-hand side of the keyboard, while playing the Style (page 21) Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2) ■ Easy Chords ■ Standard Chords 36 48 60 72 84 96 Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. C Cm • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C7 • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. Cm 7 • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. NOTE • Root notes and the corresponding keys Accompaniment range • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Standard Chords This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. CmM 7 CmM 7 (9) ( ) ( ( C (b5) CM7 b5 Cm 7 (9) Cm 7 (11) ) CM 7 aug CM7 (#11) ( Caug ) Csus 4 CM 7 (9) CM 7 ) C6 ) C (9) ( C 6 (9) C Cm (9) Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm 7 b5 CmM 7 b5 Cdim Cdim 7 C7 C 7 (13) C 7 (#9) C 7 b5 C 7 aug C 7 sus4 ) ( ) ( ) ) ( ( ) ( C 1+2+5 ) ) ( C 7 (b13) ( ) ( ( C 7 (b9) ) ) ( ) ( C 7 (#11) C 7 (9) ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm * Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 55 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords ● Recognized Standard Chords Chart Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Major [M] 1-3-5 Chord (C) C Display C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C(9) C(9) Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) * CM7(#11) CM7(#11)* 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C(b5) Cb5 * Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 Csus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9) Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) * Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5 Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9) Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13) Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9) Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7(#11) C7(#11) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13) Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C1+2+5 C* * These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function. 56 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), 1+2+5 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the [WAITING] button for longer than a second. “Dict.” will appear in the display. Dict. Hold for longer than a second. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT > .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Keys for chord type dictionary Keys for root dictionary Dict. 001 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE > .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Notation of chord Dict. NOTE • Major chords are usually indicated by the root name only. For example, the indication “C” in a score refers to a “C Major” chord. To look up the fingering for a major chord press the root key and then the M chord type key. 001 Chord name (root and type) Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 57 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords ■ About chords Playing two or more notes together simultaneously creates a “chord.” Playing a note together with two other notes spaced three notes (steps) apart—such as the notes C, E and G—creates a harmonious sound. Chords like these are called “triads” and they play an important role in most music. 3rd Root 3rd Taking the chord above as an example, the lowest note of this triad is called the “root note.” This is the central note sound, and it supports or anchors the rest of the notes chord. You’ll notice that the middle note of the chord above (E) is the third step in the succession of scale notes—C, D, then E. There are two types of “thirds” in chords: major thirds and minor thirds. Major third—four half steps from the root Minor third—three half steps from the root We’ll also alter the top note of our original chord and make three additional chords, as shown below. (The captions indicate the intervals between each of the notes.) ◆ Major chord ◆ Minor chord CM Minor 3rd ◆ Augmented chord Cm Major 3rd Major 3rd ◆ Diminished chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd C dim Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound are same, no matter if we change the order of the notes from bottom to top, or if we add other same name notes in different octaves. Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner, and emotional music can be created by playing different chords one after the other according to commonly accepted rules. Harmony determines the nature of chords, and music is created based on harmony. ● Chord names From the chord name, you can tell at a glance what type of chord it is and which notes make up the chord. Understanding the basic structure of chords is very useful—once you’re familiar with this, you’ll be quickly and easily play chords by looking at the names that appear above the notation. Cm Root note Chord type ● Chord types (These chords are among those that can be recognized by the Fingered method.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5th C7 Perfect 4th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th 58 Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Minor chord Major 7 th C 7sus4 C m7 Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th (b5) C7 7 th chord C M7 Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7th Minor 7 th Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord Function Settings The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjusting or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices. Select the item and change the value There are 34 different items that can be set. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until desired item appears. Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed 34 function items are displayed in sequence. The description and display sample is provided on the Function Setting List on page 59–60. 100 StyleVol Value 2 Function item Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. For on/off settings or the PC Mode setting, use [+]/[-] buttons. ● Function Setting List Item Style Volume Display StyleVol Range/settings Description 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose TransPos -12–00–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–000–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1 (Soft) 2 (Medium) 3 (Hard) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn Select and register a style file from flash files that are loaded from computer. Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main Voice. Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. Main Voice Chorus Send Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 59 Function Settings Item Range/settings Description D.Voice 001–482 Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. Dual Voice Chorus Send Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Voice S.Voice 001–482 Selects the Split Voice. Determines the volume of the Split Voice. Split Voice Volume 60 Display Dual Voice Selects the Dual Voice. S.Volume 000–127 Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. Split Voice Chorus Send Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81. Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Chorus Type Chorus 1–5 Determines the Chorus Type, including off (05). Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81. Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony Type. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81. Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when Harmony type 1–5 is selected. PC Mode PC0mode OFF/PC1/PC2 Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 63). Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). Initial Setup Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Use the [+] button to transmit the data. Time Signature Numerator TimeSigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68. Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual About MIDI The instrument features a MIDI terminals that can be connected to other MIDI instruments and devices for expanded musical functionality. What is MIDI? MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface for communication between electronic musical instruments and music devices. When MIDI-equipped instruments are connected via a MIDI cable, it becomes possible to transfer performance and setting data between them for significantly enhanced performance and production potential. CAUTION • Connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to external equipment only after turning off power for all devices. Then, turn on the power, first to the PSR-E313/YPT-310, then to the connected external equipment. What You Can Do With MIDI • Transferring performance and setting data between the PSR-E313/YPT310 and MIDI-equipped instruments or computers. (page 62) • Transferring the data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and computers. (page 65) PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 61 About MIDI Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument By connecting the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to other MIDI devices or a computer, the performance data of the instrument can be used on those other MIDI devices or computer, and also the performance data from other MIDI devices and computer can be received and sounded with the PSR-E313/YPT-310. ● When the instrument is connected with another MIDI device, it transmits/receives performance data. PSR-E313/ YPT-310 MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI device MIDI IN MIDI OUT ● When the instrument is connected with a computer, it transmits/ receives performance data. MIDI IN MIDI OUT USB PSR-E313/ YPT-310 A USB-MIDI interface (such as the Yamaha UX16) ■ MIDI settings These settings should be made when transmitting/receiving performance data to a connected MIDI device or computer. Local Settings Local Control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system; the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. On ........ This is the normal setting in which notes played on the instrument’s keyboard are sounded by the internal tone generator system. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. Off ....... With this setting the instrument itself produces no sound (keyboard performance, Harmony, or Style playback), but the performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. You can set the Local Control in the Function Settings (page 59). 62 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, Local Control may be the most likely cause. Playing the keyboard results in no sound when Local is set to OFF. About MIDI External Clock Settings These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). On......... The instrument’s time based functions will be synchronized to the clock from an external device connected to the MIDI terminal. Off ........ The instrument uses its own internal clock (default). You can set the External Clock in the Function Settings (page 59). NOTE • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the Song, Style, and metronome functions will not start. PC Mode The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). The selections are PC1, PC2 and OFF. ● The chart of PC Settings PC1 PC2* OFF LOCAL Off Off On EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off SONG OUT** Off Off On STYLE OUT*** Off Off On KEYBOARD OUT**** Off On On * NOTE • Song Out, Style Out and Keyboard Out can only be changed by the PC setting. They cannot be set independently. • User Songs can be used with Song Out. Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. Digital Music Notebook is a major new multimedia platform for music tuition and performance. Visit the website below for more information on the latest version of Digital Music Notebook and how to install it. www.digitalmusicnotebook.com ** Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Song playback. *** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Style playback. **** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up the PC Mode. oFF 2 PC mode Hold for longer than a second. Select PC1, PC2, or OFF by using the [+], [-] buttons. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 63 About MIDI Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the MIDI connection) —controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ● Remote control keys PSR-E313/YPT-310: To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF PSR-E313/YPT-310 Panel Setting Transmission (Initial Send) Sends the PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings to an external MIDI device. When recording a PSR-E313/YPT-310 performance to an external sequencer or similar equipment, you can use this function to send the current PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings so that when the sequence is played back the original panel settings are automatically restored. You can set Initial Send in the Function settings (page 59). 64 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. About MIDI Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer The PSR-E313/YPT-310 includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but you can load other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is SMF format 0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format). Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning with 108 and one of the loaded style/s can be registered as the 107th style. In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft Downloader application. * The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. Installing Musicsoft Downloader You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the following website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ ● The minimum computer requirements for Musicsoft Downloader operation are as follows: • OS : Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/ XP Professional • CPU : 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family (500 MHz or more is recommended) • Memory : 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) • Hard Disk : at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) • Display : 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) • Other : Microsoft® Internet Explorer®5.5 or higher NOTE • Visit the Yamaha website for more information on the latest version of Musicsoft Downloader (version 5.4.0 or higher) and how to install it. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 65 About MIDI Connecting a personal computer After installing the Musicsoft Downloader application on your computer, connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 as described below. A Yamaha UX16 or similar USB-MIDI interface (sold separately) will be necessary for MIDI connection between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a USB-equipped computer. Make sure to purchase a Yamaha UX16 or a quality USB-MIDI interface at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. If you use the UX16 interface, install the driver supplied with the interface on your computer. MIDI IN MIDI OUT USB PSR-E313/ YPT-310 A USB-MIDI interface (such as the Yamaha UX16) 66 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual About MIDI Transferring a file from a computer You can transmit Song files and Style Files from your computer to the Flash Memory on your PSR-E313/YPT-310. For details about how to transmit Song file and Style File using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: • During Style playback • During Song playback CAUTION • Use the power adaptor when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. • Never turn the power off and never plug/ unplug the AC power adaptor during data transmission. Not only will the data fail to be transferred and saved, but operation of the flash memory may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. NOTE • Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft Downloader and re-enable control of the instrument. Destination ● Data that can be loaded to the PSR-E313/YPT310 from a computer • Songs : 99 Songs max (Song numbers 108–) • Data : 373 kilobytes • Data Format : SMF Format 0 • File : 07PK3.BUP (Backup file) : ***.mid (MIDI Song) : ***.sty (Style File) PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 67 About MIDI Transferring a backup file from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to a computer You can transfer backup data (page 31) to a computer as a “backup file” by using Musicsoft Downloader. For details about how to transmit backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the PSR-E313/YPT-310. • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. CAUTION • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all backup data (including the five Songs) will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. Click here to display the backup file at the bottom of the window. ● Data that can be transferred to a computer from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 • Backup file (07PK3.BUP: backup data containing five User Songs) • Songs transferred from a computer ● Erasing Transferred Song Data from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 Memory To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use “flash clear” function on page 31. To erase specific Songs transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader. ● Using Transferred Songs for Lessons In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 60. The procedure for setting the “guide track” is as follows: Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. 68 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a Song or Style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 62.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 57), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. • The volume is too soft. • The sound quality is poor. • The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. • The recorded data of the Song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock Settings” on page 63. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 53) is set to an appropriate level. The Style does not sound properly. Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 46). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting Style number 098–106 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 098–106 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if auto accompaniment is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or Song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or Song. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–26, turning the Auto Accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. The part indications, such as Right, Left and Both Hands, do not appear—even when pressing the [R] or [L] buttons for the Lesson. Make sure that you are not pressing the [R] or [L] buttons while the Song is playing. If you press one of the part buttons while playing the Song and before starting the Lesson, these buttons serve to mute the corresponding Song tracks. Stop the Song first, then select the desired part and start the Lesson. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 69 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • NOTE The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Voice No. Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name PIANO Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name 031 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 001 0 112 1 Grand Piano 032 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar 002 0 112 2 Bright Piano 033 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 003 0 112 7 Harpsichord 034 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 004 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 035 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 005 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 036 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 006 0 113 3 CP 80 037 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 038 0 112 31 E.PIANO Distortion Guitar 007 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 008 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 039 0 112 34 Finger Bass 009 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 040 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 010 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 041 0 112 35 Pick Bass 011 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 042 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 012 0 112 8 Clavi 043 0 112 37 Slap Bass 044 0 112 39 Synth Bass ORGAN BASS 013 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 045 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 014 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 046 0 113 40 Dance Bass 015 0 112 19 Rock Organ 016 0 114 19 Purple Organ 047 0 112 49 String Ensemble 017 0 112 18 Click Organ 048 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 018 0 116 17 Bright Organ 049 0 113 50 Slow Strings 019 0 127 19 Theater Organ 050 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 020 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 051 0 112 51 Synth Strings 021 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 052 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 022 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 053 0 112 41 Violin 023 0 112 20 Church Organ 054 0 112 43 Cello 024 0 112 21 Reed Organ 055 0 112 44 Contrabass ACCORDION 056 0 112 47 Harp STRINGS 025 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 057 0 112 106 Banjo 026 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 058 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit 027 0 113 24 Bandoneon 028 0 112 23 Harmonica 059 0 112 53 Choir 060 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble GUITAR 70 Voice No. CHOIR 029 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 061 0 112 55 Air Choir 030 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 062 0 112 54 Vox Humana PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Voice List Voice No. Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name SAXOPHONE Voice No. Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name 107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 108 0 112 48 Timpani 063 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 064 0 112 66 Alto Sax 065 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 109 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 066 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 110 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 067 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 111 127 0 9 Room Kit 068 0 112 72 Clarinet 112 127 0 17 Rock Kit 069 0 112 69 Oboe 113 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 070 0 112 70 English Horn 114 127 0 26 Analog Kit 071 0 112 71 Bassoon 115 127 0 113 Dance Kit 116 127 0 33 Jazz Kit Brush Kit TRUMPET DRUM KITS 072 0 112 57 Trumpet 117 127 0 41 073 0 112 58 Trombone 118 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 074 0 113 58 Trombone Section 119 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 075 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 120 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 076 0 112 61 French Horn 121 126 0 113 077 0 112 59 Tuba 078 0 112 62 Brass Section 079 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 080 0 113 63 80’s Brass 081 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 082 0 114 63 Techno Brass 083 0 112 63 Sound Effect Kit BRASS Synth Brass FLUTE 084 0 112 74 Flute 085 0 112 73 Piccolo 086 0 112 76 Pan Flute 087 0 112 75 Recorder 088 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 089 0 112 81 Square Lead 090 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 091 0 115 82 Analogon 092 0 119 82 Fargo 093 0 112 99 Star Dust 094 0 112 86 Voice Lead 095 0 112 101 Brightness 096 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 097 0 112 95 Equinox 098 0 112 89 Fantasia 099 0 113 90 Dark Moon 100 0 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 101 0 112 12 Vibraphone 102 0 112 13 Marimba 103 0 112 14 Xylophone 104 0 112 115 105 0 112 9 Celesta 106 0 112 11 Music Box Steel Drums PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 71 Voice List ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice Name PIANO Voice Name 167 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 168 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 122 0 0 1 Grand Piano 169 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 123 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 170 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 124 0 40 1 Piano Strings 171 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 Cheezy Organ 125 0 41 1 Dream 172 126 0 0 2 Bright Piano 173 0 66 17 127 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 174 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 128 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 175 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 129 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 176 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ 130 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 177 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ Honky-tonk Piano 178 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 131 0 0 4 132 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 179 133 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 180 0 0 19 Rock Organ 134 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 181 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 135 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 182 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 136 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 183 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 137 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 184 0 0 20 Church Organ *138 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 185 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 139 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 186 140 0 0 7 Harpsichord 187 0 40 20 Notre Dame 141 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 188 0 64 20 Organ Flute 142 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 189 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 143 0 0 8 Clavi 190 0 0 21 Reed Organ 144 0 1 8 Clavi KSP 191 0 40 21 Puff Organ 192 0 0 22 Accordion Harmonica CHROMATIC 145 0 0 9 Celesta 193 0 0 23 146 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 194 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 147 0 0 11 Music Box 195 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 148 0 64 11 Orgel 196 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 149 0 0 12 Vibraphone 150 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 197 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics GUITAR 151 0 0 13 Marimba 198 152 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 199 0 96 25 Ukulele 153 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 200 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 154 0 97 13 Balimba 201 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 155 0 98 13 Log Drums 202 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 156 0 0 14 Xylophone 203 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound Tubular Bells 204 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 157 0 0 15 158 0 96 15 Church Bells 205 159 0 97 15 Carillon 206 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 160 0 0 16 Dulcimer 207 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 161 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 208 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 162 0 96 16 Cimbalom 209 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 163 0 97 16 Santur 210 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 211 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar ORGAN 72 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. MIDI Program Voice MSB LSB Change# No. (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select 164 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 212 0 45 29 Jazz Man 165 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 213 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 166 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 214 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Voice List MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name 215 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 216 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 261 0 0 49 Strings 1 217 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 262 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 218 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 263 0 8 49 Slow Strings 219 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 264 0 35 49 60’s Strings 220 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 265 0 40 49 Orchestra 266 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 Tremolo Orchestra BASS ENSEMBLE 221 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 267 0 42 49 222 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 268 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 223 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 269 0 0 50 Strings 2 224 0 0 34 Finger Bass 270 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 225 0 18 34 Finger Dark 271 0 8 50 Legato Strings 226 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 272 0 40 50 Warm Strings 227 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 273 0 41 50 Kingdom 228 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 274 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 229 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 275 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 230 0 0 35 Pick Bass 276 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 231 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 277 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 232 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 278 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 233 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 279 0 40 53 Choir Strings 234 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 280 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 235 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 281 0 0 55 Synth Voice 236 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 282 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 237 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 283 0 41 55 Choral 238 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 284 0 64 55 Analog Voice 239 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 285 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 240 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 286 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 241 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 287 0 64 56 Impact 242 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 243 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 288 0 0 57 244 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 289 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 245 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 290 0 0 58 Trombone BRASS Trumpet 246 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 291 0 18 58 Trombone 2 *247 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 292 0 0 59 Tuba 248 0 41 40 DX Bass 293 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 294 0 0 61 French Horn STRINGS 249 0 0 41 Violin 295 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 250 0 8 41 Slow Violin 296 0 32 61 French Horn 2 251 0 0 42 Viola 297 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 252 0 0 43 Cello 298 0 0 62 Brass Section 253 0 0 44 Contrabass 299 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 254 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 300 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 255 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 301 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 256 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 302 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 257 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 303 0 18 64 Soft Brass 258 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 304 0 41 64 259 0 40 47 Yang Chin 260 0 0 48 Timpani Choir Brass REED 305 0 0 65 Soprano Sax PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 73 Voice List MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. Voice No. Voice Name 306 0 0 66 Alto Sax 352 0 0 90 Warm Pad 307 0 40 66 Sax Section 353 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 308 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 354 0 0 92 Choir Pad 309 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 355 0 66 92 Itopia 310 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 356 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 311 0 0 69 Oboe 357 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 312 0 0 70 English Horn 358 0 0 95 Halo Pad 313 0 0 71 Bassoon 359 0 0 96 Sweep Pad 314 0 0 72 Clarinet 360 0 0 97 Rain 315 0 0 73 Piccolo 361 0 65 97 African Wind 316 0 0 74 Flute 362 0 66 97 Carib 317 0 0 75 Recorder 363 0 0 98 Sound Track 318 0 0 76 Pan Flute 364 0 27 98 Prologue 319 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 365 0 0 99 Crystal 320 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 366 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 321 0 0 79 Whistle 367 0 14 99 Popcorn 322 0 0 80 Ocarina 368 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 369 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel PIPE SYNTH LEAD 74 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice Name SYNTH EFFECTS 323 0 0 81 Square Lead 370 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 324 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 371 0 41 99 Clear Bells 325 0 8 81 LM Square 372 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 326 0 18 81 Hollow 373 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 327 0 19 81 Shroud 374 0 70 99 Air Bells 328 0 64 81 Mellow 375 0 71 99 Bell Harp 329 0 65 81 Solo Sine 376 0 72 99 Gamelimba 330 0 66 81 Sine Lead 377 0 0 100 Atmosphere 331 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 378 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 332 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 379 0 19 100 Hollow Release 333 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 380 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 334 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 381 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 335 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 382 0 65 100 Harp Vox 336 0 20 82 Big Lead 383 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 337 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 384 0 0 101 Brightness 338 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 385 0 0 102 Goblins 339 0 65 83 Pure Lead 386 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 340 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 387 0 65 102 Creeper 341 0 0 85 Charang Lead 388 0 67 102 Ritual 342 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 389 0 68 102 To Heaven 343 0 0 86 Voice Lead 390 0 70 102 Night 344 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 391 0 71 102 Glisten 345 0 35 87 Big Five 392 0 96 102 Bell Choir 346 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 393 0 0 103 Echoes 347 0 16 88 Big & Low 394 0 0 104 Sci-Fi 348 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 349 0 65 88 Soft Whirl WORLD 395 0 0 105 Sitar SYNTH PAD 396 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 350 0 0 89 New Age Pad 397 0 35 105 Sitar 2 351 0 64 89 Fantasy 398 0 97 105 Tamboura PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Voice List MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name 399 0 0 106 Banjo 446 64 0 33 Shower 400 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 447 64 0 34 Thunder 401 0 96 106 Rabab 448 64 0 35 Wind 402 0 97 106 Gopichant 449 64 0 36 Stream 403 0 98 106 Oud 450 64 0 37 Bubble 404 0 0 107 Shamisen 451 64 0 38 Feed 405 0 0 108 Koto 452 64 0 49 Dog 406 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 453 64 0 50 Horse 407 0 97 108 Kanoon 454 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 408 0 0 109 Kalimba 455 64 0 56 Maou 409 0 0 110 Bagpipe 456 64 0 65 Phone Call 410 0 0 111 Fiddle 457 64 0 66 Door Squeak 411 0 0 112 Shanai 458 64 0 67 Door Slam PERCUSSIVE 459 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 412 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 460 64 0 69 Scratch Split 413 0 96 113 Bonang 461 64 0 70 Wind Chime 414 0 97 113 Altair 462 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 415 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 463 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 416 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 464 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 417 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 465 64 0 83 Car Passing 418 0 0 114 Agogo 466 64 0 84 Car Crash 419 0 0 115 Steel Drums 467 64 0 85 Siren 420 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 468 64 0 86 Train 421 0 98 115 Thai Bells 469 64 0 87 Jet Plane 422 0 0 116 Woodblock 470 64 0 88 Starship 423 0 96 116 Castanets 471 64 0 89 Burst 424 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 472 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 425 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 473 64 0 91 Submarine 426 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 474 64 0 97 Laugh 427 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 475 64 0 98 Scream 428 0 65 118 Real Tom 476 64 0 99 Punch 429 0 66 118 Rock Tom 477 64 0 100 Heartbeat 430 0 0 119 Synth Drum 478 64 0 101 Footsteps 431 0 64 119 Analog Tom 479 64 0 113 Machine Gun 432 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 480 64 0 114 Laser Gun 433 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal 481 64 0 115 Explosion 482 64 0 116 Firework SOUND EFFECTS 434 0 0 121 Fret Noise 435 0 0 122 Breath Noise 436 0 0 123 Seashore 437 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 438 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 439 0 0 126 Helicopter 440 0 0 127 Applause 441 0 0 128 Gunshot 442 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 443 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 444 64 0 4 String Slap 445 64 0 17 Flute Key Click The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 75 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 76 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 109 127/0/1 110 127/0/2 111 127/0/9 112 127/0/17 113 127/0/25 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Hi Q 2 Snare L Bass Drum H Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Scratch Push Scratch Pull Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 109 127/0/1 114 127/0/26 115 127/0/28 116 127/0/33 117 127/0/41 Standard Kit 1 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Bass Drum H BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q BD Jazz BD Jazz SD Jazz L Brush Slap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Claves Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Brush Slap L Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 77 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 78 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 109 127/0/1 118 127/0/49 119 126/0/1 120 126/0/2 121 126/0/113 Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Drum Loop Bass Drum L Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 Marching Sn M String Slap Marching Sn H Jazz Tom 1 Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Flute Key Click Hand Cym. H Hand Cym.Short H Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Maou Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Style List Style No. Style Name Style No. 8 Beat Style Name Style No. Swing & Jazz Style Name Traditional 001 8BeatModern 040 BigBandFast 078 USMarch 002 60’sGtrPop 041 BigBandBallad 079 6/8March 003 8BeatAdria 042 JazzClub 080 GermanMarch 004 60’s8Beat 043 Swing1 081 PolkaPop 005 8Beat 044 Swing2 082 OberPolka 006 OffBeat 045 Five/Four 083 Tarantella 007 60’sRock 046 Dixieland 084 Showtune 008 HardRock 047 Ragtime 085 ChristmasSwing 009 RockShuffle 086 ChristmasWaltz 010 8BeatRock 087 ScottishReel 16 Beat R&B 048 Soul 049 DetroitPop Waltz 011 16Beat 050 6/8Soul 088 SwingWaltz 012 PopShuffle 051 CrocoTwist 089 JazzWaltz 013 GuitarPop 052 Rock&Roll 090 CountryWaltz 014 16BtUptempo 053 ComboBoogie 091 OberWalzer 015 KoolShuffle 054 6/8Blues 092 Musette 016 HipHopLight Country Children Ballad 055 CountryPop 093 Learning2/4 017 PianoBallad 056 CountrySwing 094 Learning4/4 018 LoveSong 057 Country2/4 095 Learning6/8 019 6/8ModernEP 058 Bluegrass 096 Fun 3/4 020 6/8SlowRock 097 Fun 4/4 021 OrganBallad 059 BrazilianSamba 022 PopBallad 060 BossaNova 098 Stride 023 16BeatBallad Latin Pianist 061 Tijuana 099 PianoSwing Dance 062 DiscoLatin 100 PianoBoogie 024 EuroTrance 063 Mambo 101 Arpeggio 025 Ibiza 064 Salsa 102 Habanera 026 SwingHouse 065 Beguine 103 SlowRock 027 Clubdance 066 Reggae 104 8BeatPianoBallad 028 ClubLatin 105 6/8PianoMarch 029 Garage1 067 VienneseWaltz 106 PianoWaltz 030 Garage2 068 EnglishWaltz 031 TechnoParty 069 Slowfox 032 UKPop 070 Foxtrot 033 HipHopGroove 071 Quickstep 034 HipShuffle 072 Tango 035 HipHopPop 073 Pasodoble Disco 074 Samba 036 70’sDisco 075 ChaChaCha 037 LatinDisco 076 Rumba 038 SaturdayNight 077 Jive 039 DiscoHands Ballroom PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 79 Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name MDB No. POP R&B MDB No. MDB Name 77 MuchoTrp 1 AlvFever 39 AmazingG 78 Sunshine 2 DayPdise 40 BoogiePf 79 Tico Org 3 GoMyWay 41 Clock Rk 80 TrbWave 4 HowDeep! 42 CU later 5 HurryLuv 43 HappyDay 81 BoxerFlt 6 Imagine 44 RisingSn 82 CntryRds 7 JustCall 45 ShookUp 83 Jambala 8 SultanSw 46 TeddyBer 84 TopWorld 9 WhitePle SWING & JAZZ 85 YlwRose 10 YesterPf ROCK COUNTRY 47 ChooChoo 48 HighMoon 86 BrazilBr BALLROOM 11 JumpRock 49 InMood 87 CherryTp 12 PickUpPc 50 MistySax 88 DanubeWv 13 RdRiverR 51 MoonLit 89 TangoAc 14 SatsfyGt 52 New York 90 Tea4Two 15 Sheriff 53 SaintMch 16 SmokeWtr 54 ShearJz 91 CampRace 17 TwistAgn 55 TstHoney 92 CielPari 18 VenusPop 56 USPatrol 93 GrndClok EASY LISTENING 94 JinglBel DANCE TRADITIONAL 19 2 of Us 57 Close2U 95 MickMrch 20 B Leave 58 Entrtain 96 Showbiz 21 Back St 59 LuvStory 97 StarMrch 22 Crockett 60 MyPrince 98 WashPost 23 FunkyTwn 61 PupetStr 99 XmasWalz 24 KillSoft 62 Raindrop 100 YankDood 25 Nine PM 63 R'ticGtr 26 SingBack 64 SingRain 27 StrandD 65 SmallWld 66 SpkSoft BALLAD 80 MDB Name 28 AdelineB 67 StrangeN 29 CatMemry 68 TimeGoes 30 ElvGhett 69 WhteXmas 31 Feeling 70 WishStar 32 Mn Rivr 71 WondrWld 33 OnMyMnd 34 OverRbow 72 BambaLa 35 ReleseMe 73 BeHappy! 36 SavingLv 74 CopaLola 37 SmokyEye 75 DayNight 38 WhisprSx 76 Ipanema PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual LATIN Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. 01 02 03 04 05 Harmony Type Duet Trio Block Country Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. 3 3 If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. 3 3 3 If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) 3 3 3 If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 10 Concert hall reverb. Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. ● Chorus Types No. 1–2 3–4 5 Chorus Type Chorus 1–2 Description Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 81 82 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1 6 38 7,10 11 64 71,73,74 Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x x x o x o x x x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed Transmitted o o o x o o o o o x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized [ Portable Keyboard ] MIDI Implementation Chart Basic Channel Function... YAMAHA Model PSR-E313/YPT-310 Expression Sustain Bank Select Modulation wheel Data Entry(MSB) Data Entry(LSB) Remarks Date:21-Aug-2006 Version:1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *1 Refer to #2 on page 84. Aux :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF Mes- :All Notes OFF sages:Active Sense :Reset x x x o o o : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune *1 o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 o o o o o Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO o 0 - 127 ************** o x o x x System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common System Exclusive Prog Change 72 84 91,93 96,97 100,101 o : Yes x : No Release Time Portamento Cntrl Effect 1,3 Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB MIDI Implementation Chart PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 83 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.” <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 0 1 2 8 16 17 0 No Effect 1 (01)Hall1 2 Room 3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 4 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 5...127 (02)Hall2 18 19 20 (03)Hall3 (04)Room1 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 0...63 1 2 8 16 17 No Effect 64 Thru 65 Chorus 66 Celeste 67 Flanger 68...127 84 0 (2)Chorus2 No Effect PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual (1)Chorus1 (3)Flanger1 (4)Flanger2 18 19 20 Specifications Keyboards • 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response Display • LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Panel Controls • [L]/[REC TRACK 2], [R]/[REC TRACK 1], [LISTEN & LEARN], [TIMING], [WAITING], [A-B REPEAT]/[ACMP ON/OFF], [REW]/[INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [FF]/[[MAIN/AUTO FILL], [TEMPO/TAP], [REC], [PAUSE]/[SYNC START], [START/STOP], [SONG], [STYLE], [VOICE], [FUNCTION], [PORTABLE GRAND], [MUSIC DATABASE], [REVERB ON/OFF], [DEMO], [METRONOME ON/OFF], [SPLIT ON/OFF], [DUAL ON/OFF], [HARMONY ON/OFF], [TOUCH ON/OFF], number buttons [0]–[9], [+/ YES], [-/ NO] Voice • 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 1 sound effect kit + 359 XGlite voices + 2 XGlite optional voices • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • 106 preset Styles + flash memory • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi fingering • Style Volume • Style Register Education Feature • Chord Dictionary • Lesson 1–3 Function • Style Volume, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Register, Main voice (Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Dual voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Split voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, PC mode (PC1/PC2/Off), Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Setup Send, Time Signature (Numerator, Denominator), Metronome Volume, Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Demo Cancel MIDI • Local On/Off • Initial Setup Send • External Clock • PC mode Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Speakers • 12cm x 2 Power Consumption • 10W (When using PA-130 power adaptor) Power Supply • Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent • Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 945 x 370 x 128 mm (37-1/4" x 14-5/8" x 5-1/16") Weight • 4.9kg (10 lbs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories • AC Power Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent • USB-MIDI Interface: UX16 • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Effects • Reverb: 9 types • Chorus: 4 types • Harmony: 26 types Song • 102 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory • Song Clear • Song Volume Music Database • 100 Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 85 Index Panel Controls and Terminals Alphabetical Order A-B REPEAT button ................................................. 41 ACMP ON/OFF button .............................................. 21 DEMO button ............................................................. 19 DUAL ON/OFF button .............................................. 13 FF button .................................................................... 19 FUNCTION button .............................................. 33, 59 HARMONY ON/OFF button .................................... 42 INTRO/ENDING/rit. Button ..................................... 51 L button ...................................................................... 36 LISTEN & LEARN button ........................................ 36 MAIN/AUTO FILL button ........................................ 51 MASTER VOLUME control ................................. 9, 32 METRONOME ON/OFF button ............................... 24 number buttons 0–9, +/YES, -/NO ............................ 33 PAUSE button ............................................................ 19 PORTABLE GRAND button .................................... 15 R button ...................................................................... 36 REC button ................................................................. 27 REC TRACK 1 button ............................................... 29 REC TRACK 2 button ............................................... 29 REVERB ON/OFF button ......................................... 43 REW button ............................................................... 19 SONG button ....................................................... 18, 33 SPLIT ON/OFF button .............................................. 14 STANDBY/ON switch .......................................... 9, 32 START/STOP button ................................................. 32 STYLE button ...................................................... 20, 33 SYNC START button ................................................ 21 TEMPO/TAP button .................................................. 48 TIMING button .......................................................... 37 TOUCH ON/OFF button ........................................... 45 VOICE button ...................................................... 12, 33 WAITING button ....................................................... 38 A DC IN 12V jack ........................................................... 8 MIDI IN/OUT terminal .............................................. 61 PHONES/OUTPUT jack .............................................. 9 SUSTAIN jack ............................................................. 9 E AB Repeat .................................................................. 41 AC Power Adaptor ....................................................... 8 ACMP ON/OFF ......................................................... 21 Auto Accompaniment ................................................ 21 Auto accompaniment range .................................. 21–22 B Backup ........................................................................ 31 Backup Clear .............................................................. 31 Backup File ................................................................ 31 Battery .......................................................................... 8 Beat Display ............................................................... 34 C Cancel ......................................................................... 30 Chord ........................................................ 22, 55–56, 58 Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 57 Chord Display ...................................................... 34, 56 Chorus ........................................................................ 44 Chorus Send Level (Dual) .......................................... 60 Chorus Send Level (Main) ......................................... 59 Chorus Send Level (Split) .......................................... 60 Chorus Type List ........................................................ 81 Computer .............................................................. 62–68 D Delete (Song) ............................................................. 30 Demo .......................................................................... 19 Display ....................................................................... 34 Drum Kit .................................................................... 15 Drum Kit List ............................................................. 76 Dual ............................................................................ 13 Ending .................................................................. 50, 52 External Clock ...................................................... 60, 63 F FF ............................................................................... 19 Flash Clear ................................................................. 31 Flash Memory ............................................................ 67 Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................. 9 Function Setting List ............................................ 59–60 G Grade .......................................................................... 37 H Harmony ............................................................... 42–43 Harmony Type List .................................................... 81 Harmony Volume ....................................................... 60 86 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Index I S Initial Send ................................................................. 60 Initialization ............................................................... 31 Intro ...................................................................... 49, 52 Save data to computer ................................................ 68 SMF Format 0 ............................................................ 65 Song ............................................................................ 18 Song List .................................................................... 19 Song Volume .............................................................. 39 Split ............................................................................ 14 Split Point ............................................................. 14, 46 Start ............................................................................ 32 Stop ............................................................................ 32 Style .......................................................... 20–21, 49–52 Style File .............................................................. 54, 67 Style List .................................................................... 79 Style Volume .............................................................. 53 Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 85 Synchro Start ........................................................ 21, 49 K Keyboard Display ...................................................... 34 L Lesson .................................................................. 35–38 Lesson track R/L for transferred songs ................ 60, 68 Local .................................................................... 60, 62 M Main/Auto fill ...................................................... 51–52 Master Volume Control ......................................... 9, 32 Measure ...................................................................... 34 Melody Voice ............................................................. 39 Metronome ........................................................... 24–26 Metronome Volume ................................................... 26 MIDI .......................................................................... 61 Music Database .......................................................... 23 Music Rest ................................................................... 6 Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 65 Mute ........................................................................... 40 N NO .............................................................................. 30 Notation ...................................................................... 34 O Octave (Dual) ............................................................. 60 Octave (Main) ............................................................ 59 Octave (Split) ............................................................. 60 One Touch Setting ..................................................... 47 Option ........................................................................ 85 P Panel Sustain .............................................................. 44 Part ............................................................................. 36 Pause .......................................................................... 19 PC setting ................................................................... 63 Press and Hold for a while ......................................... 32 T Tempo ........................................................................ 48 Time Signature ........................................................... 25 Touch Response ......................................................... 45 Touch sensitivity ........................................................ 45 Track .............................................................. 28, 34, 40 Track Rec ............................................................. 28–29 Transfer ................................................................ 62, 68 Transpose ................................................................... 46 Tuning ........................................................................ 47 Turn Auto accompaniment on or off .......................... 21 U User Song ............................................................. 27–28 V Voice .................................................................... 12–14 Voice List ................................................................... 70 X XGlite ........................................................................... 6 Y YES ............................................................................ 30 R Recording ............................................................. 27–29 Remote Control .......................................................... 64 Reverb ........................................................................ 43 Reverb Level .............................................................. 60 Reverb Type List ........................................................ 81 Rew ............................................................................ 19 Rhythm ....................................................................... 20 Root ...................................................................... 55, 57 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 87 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR, YPT SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________ (Retailer) YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! 88 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN EUROPE Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 NORWAY THE UNITED KINGDOM ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 38 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only) http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WH70550 XXXPOTYX.X-01A0 Printed in China
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90

Yamaha YPT-310 Handleiding

Categorie
Synthesizer
Type
Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor